JP7378143B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachi-slot machines and pachinko machines.

In conventional gaming machines, there are two types: a special gaming state (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and a special gaming state (for example, AT state) in which the expectation level of transition to this special gaming state is higher than that of the normal gaming state. For example, a CZ (chance zone) state) has been proposed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-104445

By the way, such a gaming machine has a problem that , for example , if the gameplay is monotonous, the interest in the gaming may be reduced.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

a variable display means (for example, a variable display section) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns;
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing) that determines a winning combination;
a stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) that stops the fluctuating display of symbols according to the determination result by the winning combination determination means and the player's stop operation;
a notification means (for example, an instruction monitor or an effect display unit) capable of notifying information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player;
comprising a notification mode determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that determines the navigation type in the determining manner shown in FIGS. 56 and 57) capable of determining a notification mode by the notification means,
When the winning combination determining means determines a predetermined combination (e.g., pressing order bell) as a winning combination, the stop control means controls the predetermined combination when a stop operation is performed in a correct manner (e.g., correct pressing order). While displaying a symbol combination (for example, a "bell" symbol combination) that can give a number (for example, 9 pieces) of gaming value, if the stop operation is performed in a manner different from the correct answer manner, the above-mentioned It is possible to not display symbol combinations that can give a predetermined number of gaming values,
The states in which notification by the notification means can be made include a first state (for example, CZ2 normal state), a second state (for example, AT state), and a third state (for example, ending state),
When the winning combination determining means determines the predetermined combination as a winning combination, the notification mode determining means determines a first determination mode in the first state (for example, a determination mode shown in the "CZ2 normal" column in FIG. 56). The notification mode is determined in the second state, the notification mode is determined in the second determination mode (for example, the determination format shown in the "AT" column in FIG. 56), and the third state is determined in the third state. It is possible to decide the notification mode according to a decision mode (for example, a decision mode shown in the "Ending" column in FIG. 56),
When the notification mode is determined in the third determination mode, all of the correct answer modes are notified, but when the notification mode is determined in the first determination mode and the second determination mode, In some cases, all of the correct answer modes may not be reported,
When the winning combination determining means determines a specific combination (for example, a common bell) as a winning combination, the stop control means displays a symbol combination that can give the predetermined number of gaming values regardless of the mode of the stop operation. It is possible to
The notification mode determining means is capable of determining the notification mode in the second determination mode even when the winning combination determining means determines the specific combination as a winning combination in the second state;
When determining the notification mode in the second determination mode, it may be determined that the correct answer mode is not notified (for example, no navigation);
The probability that the correct answer mode will not be reported is higher when the winning combination determining means determines the specific combination as the winning combination than when the winning combination determining means determines the predetermined combination as the winning combination. is high;
In the first state, there is no set number of games, and the number of times a symbol combination that can give the predetermined number of gaming values is not displayed in a game in which the winning combination determination means has determined the predetermined combination as a winning combination is defined. This gaming machine is characterized in that it can be continued until a certain number of times (for example, 7 times) is reached .
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to enhance the gameplay and increase the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the internal structure of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing medal reception/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a game during an advantageous period, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing periodic interrupt processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing various tables of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the instruction monitor of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the instruction monitor of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the lock effect of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a start effect executed at the start of the RB state of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a start effect executed at the start of the RB state of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a push order history display of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine.

[1. Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. Note that FIG. 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. Further, for convenience of explanation, in the following explanation of the external structure, a part of the internal structure may be explained, and in the explanation of the internal structure, a part of the external structure may be explained.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes a housing 2 in the shape of a rectangular box. The housing 2 also includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as the gaming machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD placed at the upper front of the cabinet G, and an upper door mechanism UD placed at the lower front of the cabinet G. It has a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a back wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that in FIGS. 1 and 2, illustration of the rear wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is omitted. Furthermore, two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, and penetrating in the vertical direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G4a.

Note that the plate member G4b is used to fix the pachislot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in a game parlor, but as long as such a fixing method is secured, metal or resin materials can be used. Alternatively, it can be formed integrally with the upper wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component may be made of wood or resin.

Furthermore, inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side across the intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the lower side across the intermediate support plate G1. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with the intermediate support plate G1 in between, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. There is. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and houses a main display device 210, which will be described later, and the like. Further, the lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, etc., which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily need to be configured to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device etc. is appropriately accommodated within the cabinet G, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper space and the lower space are not partitioned. Moreover, the cabinet G can be simply called a "box body" or a "main body", and since it functions as a frame body that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as a "body frame", It can also be referred to as a "support body", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper space and the lower space of the opening in the cabinet G. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as a front door provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Note that either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is configured to be able to be opened and closed by the above-mentioned opening/closing mechanism, and the other is configured to be detachable only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. You can also do that.

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided in the center thereof, and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured, for example, as a transparent panel made of resin, and allows visual confirmation of an effect image displayed on a screen device C that constitutes a main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the back side of the effect display window UD1. In addition, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that displays effects via the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided approximately at the center of the upper part thereof, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G on the back side of the main display window 4. There is.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the circumferential surface of the reel body. symbols) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the rotation direction of the reels. Further, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each reel can rotate at a constant speed in the vertical direction. The main display window 4 is configured as a transparent panel made of resin, for example, and allows at least some (for example, three) of the symbols on the circumferential surface of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visually recognized. Furthermore, inside each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs to be described later) is provided at least at a position where the symbols are visible from the main display window 4, and at least each reel 3L, When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from inside with a constant brightness to ensure the visibility of the symbols.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4, and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub effect display section 22 displays an effect image displayed on a sub display device 220, which will be described later. Note that the sub effect display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a function of displaying effects but also as one of the buttons for effects. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided in the substantially horizontal pedestal portion formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, and settlement button 9 provided on the left side, and the settlement button 9 provided approximately in the center. It has a presentation button 10a and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b are used to perform game operations (bet operations) by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the Pachislot machine 1. This is the operation section that accepts the commands (which can also be referred to as "", etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3 medals) and the number of medals credited is greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals will be bet. Ru. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The payment button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a game operation (payment operation) by the player to return (payment) the credited medals. In addition, if the payment button 9 is operated when there are no medals credited, the credit for the medals to be inserted or paid out is within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). It may also be possible to accept a player's gaming operation (C/P mode selection operation) to enable selection of either mode (C mode) or pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited. That is, the payment button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The performance button 10a is an operation unit that receives a performance operation (performance operation) from the player.

The medal slot 5 receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The accepted medal is detected by a selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not it is an appropriate medal. If one of the accepted medals is not proper, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Furthermore, if the accepted one medal is a proper one and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current bet number is the maximum bet number and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-mentioned pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode thereof.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side below the pedestal, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R provided approximately in the center, and a start lever 7 provided on the right side. It has a locking mechanism 15. The start lever 7 is an operation section that is attached to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) from the player to start the game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation section that accepts a game operation (stop operation) by a player to stop the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in a closed state, an administrator of the game parlor (for example, a clerk of the game parlor, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD becomes open. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have not only the function of managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism but also the function of a reset switch. For example, if the manager of the game parlor inserts a door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state, the upper door mechanism UD can also be configured to be in the open state in conjunction with this, and the lock corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD can be It is also possible to provide separate mechanisms so that opening and closing can be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also includes a waist panel 13 provided at the center of the lower part, a medal tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal payout port 11 provided above the medal tray 12. , sound-transmitting holes 24a and 24b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout opening 11.

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the model name or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source (such as a lamp or LED described later) for illuminating this decorative panel from the back side. Consists of a lumbar lamp (included). The medal receiver 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. The medal payout port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. Note that the medals discharged from the medal dispensing port 11 include those dispensed from a hopper device 32 (described later) and those returned from a selector 31 (described later) through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back side of each of the speakers 35a and 35b (the symbol of the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) installed on the inside of the cabinet G to output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Note that in this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in response to the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be constructed as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can also be simply referred to as a "door" or "door", and since they function as members that can open and close the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors". It can also be referred to as a "door member" or a "door member."

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R starts rotating when the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is operated (when a stop operation is performed by the player), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are drive-controlled for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. This stops each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed on the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 are variable display units (means) that can variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols in multiple rows, or variably display (and stop display) a plurality of symbols. ) configuring a plurality of possible variable display units (means). Note that the variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)", a "variable display section (means)", etc. Further, the symbols can be referred to as "pictures", "patterns", etc., and can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense, since any information that can be visually identified by the player is sufficient.

Further, the main display window 4 is configured such that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols for each reel are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (3 symbols in total) (3 rows x 3 columns within the frame of the main display window 4). (The design is displayed in this manner.) Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "symbol display area" or a "window section."

Furthermore, an effective line is defined in the main display window 4. The valid line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols has been displayed when symbols in all rows have been stopped and displayed in response to a stop operation by the player. In this sense, the active line can also be referred to as a "winning line", a "judgment line", etc. Further, the effective line is configured as a line that connects any one of the regions in each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a manner of 3 rows x 3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 valid lines. However, in reality, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line," and the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the top area of the reel 3C, and the top area of the reel 3R is the "center line." The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the reel 3R. The line that connects the upper area is called a "cross-up line," and the line that connects the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called a "cross-down line." Since the line connects each region in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as the effective line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each area of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the active line to be activated, the medals required for the current game (the number of medals available for starting the game) must be bet before the player starts the operation. The number of active lines displayed may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines mentioned above are defined as the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line", then in the case of the former, the number of bets is either 1 to 3. ``Centerline'', ``Topline'', and ``Bottomline'' are enabled even if On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" will be activated, if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" will be activated, and if the number of bets is 3 (maximum bet number), the "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are enabled.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, so that 3 rows x 3 Although the symbols are displayed in a column format, the symbol display format in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is 1, 2, or 4 or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each row is 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the design with . Furthermore, in this case, the number of definable effective lines is also increased or decreased as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the variable display section displays the symbols in a variable manner by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub display device 220 described later, or it may be configured using other display devices (for example, organic EL or 7-segment LED). . Alternatively, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (eg, a belt, etc.) may be used. Further, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section directly related to the game, which is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-display section that is controlled by a sub-display section that is related to performances that are not directly related to games. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220. In other words, a variable display section that displays symbols in a variable manner in response to a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and that stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). In addition to the main side display section, a sub side display section may also be provided. In this case, in order for the player to be able to identify whether the variable display section is directly related to the game or not, the words "Kyokudou" or "Main Reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient to attach an identification display in which is displayed to make it possible to identify that the variable display section is the main display section. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 that receives medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. Note that the medal slot 5 and the selector 31 (to be described later) have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b, so such an insertion operation is , for example, can also be referred to as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In addition, in this embodiment, the use of medals as game media is explained as an example of the game value used in the game or given according to the game result, but the game value used in this way is It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, etc. can also be used. Further, the gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "gaming value".

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operating sections as operating sections that can be operated by a player. Note that each operation section shown below is just an example, and the configuration may include a different operation section, or the configuration may not include operation sections that are not necessarily essential. .

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a MAX bet button 6a and a 1 bet button 6b that accept a bet operation by a player to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Further, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's bet operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are provided, but only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1 bet button 6b. Further, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the start lever 7 that accepts a player's start operation to start the game. Further, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) that can detect the player's start operation. Note that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's starting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and which accept a stop operation by a player to stop the rotation of each reel. Further, such a start operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R and stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player. Note that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Payment button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the settlement button 9 that accepts the player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (settlement) the credited medals. Further, such a payment operation is detected by a payment switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the payment button 9 and the payment switch 9S constitute a payment operation detection unit (means) that can detect the payment operation by the player. Note that the payment button only needs to be able to detect the player's payment operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Performance button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes performance buttons 10a and 10b that accept performance operations from the player. Note that such presentation operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective presentation buttons. Therefore, the performance buttons 10a, 10b and the detection switch constitute a performance operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the performance operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, in this embodiment, two effect buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is also possible to configure the system without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more presentation buttons are provided.

The main uses of the presentation buttons include changing the presentation mode when executing a specific presentation (for example, operation-linked presentation described below), and performing selection/decision operations in the user menu described below. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so that buttons for effects are provided depending on the purpose. For example, it is assumed that the presentation buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the above-mentioned touch panel may be used for the latter purpose. Note that for use in the latter purpose, it is also possible to provide a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations as another presentation button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout port]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. In addition, when a winning occurs and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 is for giving the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can also be said that it is part of the means. Further, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal saucer]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. That is, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) that can store the awarded game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a waist panel 13 that includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically shows the type of pachislot machine 1 in an easy-to-understand manner to the player, but for example, the waist panel 13 itself can be By configuring it with an image display device or the like, it can be configured as one of the performance execution means that can execute the performance.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information regarding the game depending on the lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) that can display information regarding games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp indicates that medals can be inserted by lighting up. By lighting up, the start lamp indicates that the game can be started in conjunction with the operation of the start lever 7. When lit, the replay lamp indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals depending on the lighting mode. The number of payout lamps display the number of medals (number of payouts) that have been paid out according to game results depending on the lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (status display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified in a situation where the player is notified of the information on the stop operation (for example, in an AT state), thereby providing information on the stop operation. Display. Note that "an aspect that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified" refers to, for example, the press order (in this embodiment, this may be referred to as "batting order"), "1st (the first stop operation When notifying the press order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)", display the numerical value "1" on the instruction monitor. The number "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and when the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)" is notified, the number "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. It is about. Note that the notification lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, information on the stop operation may be displayed using either a credit lamp or a payout number lamp.

In this way, in the present embodiment, in a situation where information on a stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main performance display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, In addition, information on the stop operation is also notified by an instruction monitor as a main notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. Note that the mode of notification in the main side notification means and the mode of notification in the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means only needs to notify in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", even if the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to specify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify information about the stop operation. For example, when notifying the push order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly notify instruction information for causing the reels 3L to perform the first stop operation.

Further, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (described later), the section lamp lights up at any timing until the start of the game in the advantageous section, and then when the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. In this case, the light is turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamps is not limited to this. For example, when first transitioning from a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (normally advantageous section) to an increased section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section, any arbitrary period until the game in the increased section starts. It may also be something that lights up at the right time. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the section is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least an advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section. It may also be possible to report the period until the end of the period.

Further, the limit lamp indicates that a limit process, which will be described later, has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the light is turned on to notify the player that the advantageous state (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. Further, for example, when the limit process is about to be executed, the light blinks to indicate that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the limit process. In addition, other information related to the limit process can be reported as appropriate by providing other triggers for turning on, blinking, or turning off the light.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main performance display section 21 and the sub-performance display section 22 constitute a performance display section (means) capable of displaying a performance. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player.

The main performance display section 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays a performance via the performance display window UD1. The main display device 210 also includes a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display, and an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with light. In this embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, sophisticated and powerful effect display is possible, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is sufficient if it is possible to provide a visual effect to the player, and it may be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL device, a 7-segment LED device, etc., or a display device such as a sub-reel, etc. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in the case where the pachi-slot machine 1 is mainly designed to provide entertainment based on so-called rolls, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured to include a sub display device 220. Further, the sub display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Note that, like the main display device 210, the sub display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or a display device, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Further, from this point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main performance display section 21 is configured with a large screen, it mainly displays performances closely related to the current game, such as push order notification, winning notification, continuous performance, etc., and the sub performance display section 22 is composed of a small screen, so it is possible to display the display contents separately depending on the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not closely related to the current game, such as game history etc. It is possible. In addition, in this embodiment, the main effect display section 21 and the sub effect display section 22 are configured to be provided, but it is also possible to configure without providing either of these sections. It is also possible to configure so that only one of them is provided. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so that three or more effect display sections are provided.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 mentioned as an example, has a light emission mode (not only lighting, flashing, or turning off, but also the brightness and color of the light when configured as a full-color LED). ) is equipped with one or more lamps (light emitting means) that can perform effects. Moreover, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from a visual viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation sections provided in each operation section. Examples include lamps and the like. Note that the latter includes a function that informs the player whether or not each operation part can be operated, so when such a function is activated, the light emission mode does not change depending on the content of the performance. , it can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission mode.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means that can produce effects by outputting audio. Moreover, it is configured as one of the performance execution means that can perform a performance from an auditory viewpoint to the player. In addition, from such a viewpoint, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with production devices other than the various production devices (production execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to perform a performance by providing a performance device such as a movable performance device such as a so-called role model, a vibration performance device that performs a performance using vibration, or an air performance device that performs a performance by jetting air. In other words, a performance device that can execute a performance that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, smell) (allows the player to recognize that the performance is being performed). If so, you can use any of them. Therefore, in this embodiment, "performing a performance" means, unless otherwise specified, using any one or more of the above-mentioned various performance devices (direction execution means) to perform a performance. This indicates that it may be executed.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (number omitted in FIG. 2) is a flow path for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether the detected medal is an appropriate medal. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal and the medal is in a state where it can be accepted, the sorting device transfers the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. The drive is controlled so that it is guided. Note that in this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, and when the medal cannot be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancellation chute to the medal payout port 11. The drive is controlled so that it is returned from. If an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection section (means) that can detect the inserted game medium. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a determining means capable of determining whether or not the inserted gaming medium is appropriate. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a distributing means that stores the inserted game media internally when it is appropriate, and discharges it to the outside when the inserted game medium is not appropriate. Furthermore, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section that stores medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and is provided at the bottom of the bucket section, and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disk section that guides medals one by one to a discharging section, a discharging section that discharges medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharging section.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage 33, which will be described later, through a guide path provided on the top side. Note that when the medals stored in the bucket section become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, if a reset operation is performed after replenishing medals, the error state will be canceled.

The disk part has a plurality of medal-shaped hollow parts formed radially from the center, and when the central shaft is rotationally driven in accordance with a drive signal, the medals fitted in the hollow parts are guided one by one to the ejection part. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are stirred by the rotation of the disk section. Further, if an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam) is removed, the error state will be canceled.

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when dispensing one medal, the disc part starts rotating, and then stops rotating in response to the count sensor counting the dispensing of one medal. In this way, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game media payout unit (means) that can pay out game media. Further, as described above, it can be said that it is part of a privilege granting means that grants a privilege to a player. Further, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The medal auxiliary storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage 33 includes, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage that is provided near the storage section and detects the capacity of medals stored in the storage section. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, a medal auxiliary storage error occurs. In this case, if the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage unit to at least a certain number, the error state will be canceled.

That is, the medal auxiliary storage 33 constitutes a surplus game media storage section (means) that can store surplus game media. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 includes, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. Note that the power supply device 34 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the power cable (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part, similar to household electrical appliances. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) that can supply necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting key type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). It is also possible to configure the power supply device 34 to include a switch.

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as necessary for various controls. Note that each of the substrates shown below is merely an example, and the structure may include a different substrate, or the structure may not include substrates that are not necessarily essential.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the back side of the reel unit RU within the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to games, and is located inside a resin main control board case (not shown) that is transparent (or nearly transparent) so that its status can be visually recognized. is housed in. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

Note that there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and it is basically configured by DIP mounting various electronic components, but some or all of the various electronic components may be SMT mounted (surface mounting). It may also be configured by implementing (implementing). Further, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. Moreover, small electronic components not exceeding 6 mm2 may be used for some or all of the various electronic components. Further, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached within the cabinet G to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. The sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. Note that the sub-control board case can be constructed as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or it can be constructed of another material that is opaque (or nearly opaque). It can also be configured as a case using . The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other boards]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (symbol omitted in FIG. 2) is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is connected to various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main controller. This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the main relay board 73 can be controlled as the main control board unless there is a particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided and is placed on the board 71. Further, from this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of boards may be provided as the main relay board.

(Sub relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), and is installed between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and This is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Note that the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, so all functions of the sub-relay board 74 can be performed as a sub-control board if there is no particular problem. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay board 74 is not provided and is placed on the board 72. Further, from this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is installed at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower space), and receives signals such as a medal input signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal. Output to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. Note that the output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be set as appropriate, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the bonus state or AT state) can be set externally according to the playability. It makes it possible to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display device or hall computer, these devices can be used to check not only the status of medal insertion and payout and the occurrence of errors in the pachislot machine 1. , it is possible to recognize such internal state transitions.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the test machine in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (Please note that the pachi-slot machine 1 as a release product for sale is not equipped with these relay boards, so the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 301 for the test machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, test signals for controlling the main operations related to the game (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and are also determined by the main control board 71. Test signals and the like related to the pressed order navigation are outputted via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained. Note that FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. Main control board 71 and main relay board 73, main relay board 73 and sub-relay board 74, and sub-relay board 74 and sub-control board 72 are electrically connected, respectively. The main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other via the main relay board 73 and the sub-control board 74 so as to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72. connected.

A main control circuit 100 as a game control section that controls games is mounted on the main control board 71. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by execution of a control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signals. Furthermore, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from among the generated random numbers as necessary. In this way, control related to the overall gaming operation is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as an effect control section that controls effects. The sub control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 203, and the like. Further, a ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 includes various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, and various presentation data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub display device 220, lamps, etc.). Lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 includes a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by execution of a control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control commands (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, etc. provided. Note that the random number value for the performance may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100. Alternatively, a sub-ROM may be included in the sub-control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs etc. may be stored in the sub-ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may be configured to store various performance data, and the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200 may be configured to store various control programs and various data tables. Further, the sub control circuit 200 includes a microprocessor (for example, also referred to as "VDP") dedicated to images, such as a GPU, which allows images to be displayed on the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220. It may be configured to generate (edit).

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key type switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external centralized terminal board 55, a hopper device 32, a medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, and a power supply. A device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 is electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, and information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. Note that, if the first interface board 301 for a test machine and the second interface board 302 for a test machine are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, payment switch 9S, information display device 14, testing machine Since the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine have already been explained, their explanation will be omitted here.

The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R are connected to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears each having a predetermined reduction ratio, and are driven to rotate and stop the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Note that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, so the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51R, The number of times a pulse is outputted to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol position of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is managed based on the count result. Furthermore, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for performing such management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index. .

The setting key type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, 6 levels of settings 1 to 6) (setting change), or when checking the settings of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for. Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player regarding the game, and usually, the lower the setting value (for example, the closer to setting 1), the relative degree of advantage the player has. The higher the setting value (for example, the closer it is to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player becomes. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an administrator at the game parlor inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position from the counterclockwise position. and turns off. Note that when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered off, turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power will enable settings to be changed, and the settings can be changed while the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on. When the key-type switch 52 is turned on, settings can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator at the game parlor. The reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. Further, the reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a setting value determination operation by a manager at the game parlor in a state where settings can be changed. Note that when the reset switch 53 is operated in a state where settings can be changed, the setting value increases by 1 each time it is operated (when setting 6 is reached, the setting returns to setting 1). In this way, the setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this way is determined when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. In other words, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting a setting value confirmation operation by the administrator of the game parlor. In this way, when changing the settings, turn on the setting key type switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select the setting value, and operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key type switch 52. Note that this is an example of a setting change operation, and the configuration may be such that the setting change can be performed by other operations. Furthermore, when changing or confirming settings, the current setting value may be displayed on the above-mentioned credit lamp or payout number lamp, for example.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a four-digit seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The winning ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various ratio information regarding the game that has been aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101. These ratio information are used by the game parlor manager when checking whether the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with or not. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. It's okay. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the above-mentioned various ratio information will be displayed. good. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54, for example. Immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined period of time (for example, about 10 seconds, which serves as a buffer considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200), the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning properly, use a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up). It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is turned on (or blinks) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitoring device 54, for example, the type of ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous character ratio information and character ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous character ratio information. There is also information on the ratio of accessories.

Specific section ratio information refers to the stop operation that is advantageous to the player within the game section of the target number of games (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). This is information indicating the ratio of the number of games played (or may simply be the number of games played during an advantageous period) in the game period (for example, AT state) in which the information was reported. In addition, continuous accessory ratio information refers to the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation (the consecutive bonuses related to the first-class special bonus) This is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out to the first class special bonus (RB) in a state where the operating device (BB) is operating (including during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB)). In addition, the accessory ratio information indicates that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special bonus (RB), the second type special bonus (CB), and the normal bonus (SB) ) is the information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first-class special bonus (RB), and here, when the first-class special bonus (RB) is in operation, the first-class special bonus (RB) is operated by the continuous operation device for the first-class special bonus (RB). This concept includes the state in which the first type special accessory (RB) is in operation while the second type special accessory (CB) is in operation. This concept includes the operation of the second type special accessory (CB) in a state where the accessory continuous operation device (MB) according to the above is in operation.

Note that the game period in which information on stop operations advantageous to the player was being reported (for example, AT state) is considered to be when the accessory is in operation or when the accessory continuous operation device is in operation, and the respective ratio information is It can also be subject to aggregation and calculation. That is, the role ratio monitoring device 54 may be any device that appropriately displays necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. For example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with the first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function). For models that do not have the corresponding numerical information (correspondence information), when displaying the item, the last two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio). On the 7-segment LED, for example, by displaying an identification display for non-compatible information, such as lighting up two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", it is possible to confirm that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable that the user can recognize the information at a glance.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. Note that it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be configured to be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is in the open state and turning off when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state. Note that when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on, a door opening error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is brought into the closed state.

A ROM cartridge board 202, a main display device 210, and a sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72. Further, the sub control board 72 is connected via the sub relay board 74 to a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as the performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps/LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. A group of speakers such as the following are electrically connected.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, presentation button group, lamps/LEDs, and speaker group have already been described, so their description will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD, similarly to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56. Note that it is the same as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it has the function of monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing such monitoring to be performed on the sub control circuit 200 side as well, the lower door mechanism DD can be further improved. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. Note that this opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the game being opened after the manager of the game parlor has left after business hours, or if there is a history of the game being opened and closed for a long time during business hours, this may result in fraudulent activity. It is now possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that an act has been committed.

[3. Pachislot machine function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is selected. One random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

An internal lottery means (main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process to be described later) performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. By determining the internal winning combination, combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed on the active line are determined in advance. In addition, the types of symbol combinations are those related to "winning" where the player is given benefits such as medal payout, replay activation, bonus activation, etc., and those related to other so-called "losing". Such things are provided. Furthermore, the winnings related to the payout of medals are called "small winnings", the winnings related to the activation of replays are called "replay winnings", and the winnings related to the activation of bonuses (bonus status) are called "bonus winnings". to be called. Furthermore, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols that is permitted to be realized) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Further, the internal winning combination is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination," "predetermined result," or "derivation permissible condition." Further, the internal lottery means is sometimes referred to as a "winning combination determining means", "winning combination determining means", "advance determining means", or "derivation permissible condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), the plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop button (stop button 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reel (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (described below) The main CPU 101) that performs reel stop control processing performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button is pressed (or the order in which the stop button is pressed). Note that the operating means for performing the starting operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, but any operating means may be used as long as the player can perform the starting operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, but any operation that allows the player to perform the stop operation may be used. It may be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reels rotate within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces." In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of winning symbol combinations is determined, the reel stop control means normally causes the symbol combination to appear on the active line within a specified time of 190 msec (4 symbols). Stop the reel rotation so that it is displayed as much as possible at the top. Further, the reel stop control means uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations whose display is not permitted due to the internal winning combination are not displayed on the active line. Note that the symbols displayed when the reels stop rotating are sometimes referred to as a "stop display" or a "display result." Furthermore, displaying symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "deriving a stop display" or "deriving a display result."

The reel stop control means also includes an automatic reel stop control means that automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the reels have rotated, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. Stop control may also be performed. In this case, the reels will stop without the player's stop operation, so even if any internal winning combination has been determined, any combination of winning symbols will be valid. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when the rotation of all the plurality of reels is stopped, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs winning operation determination processing described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is related to winning. (or some other predetermined value). That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined symbol combination) has been established. The displayed symbol combination is determined by the winning determination means to be a winning symbol (or other predetermined symbol combination) (i.e., a winning symbol combination (or other predetermined symbol combination). ) is established, the player is given benefits such as the payout of medals, or various controls are performed using this as an opportunity. In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the above-described series of games is played as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means merely determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the active line corresponds to any one of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols corresponds to an internal winning combination determined by an internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may be determined whether the combination of symbols is related to a winning combination or not, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately performs the stop control, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the occurrence of erroneous winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control burden related to erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols involved in winning a prize is a combination of symbols that is permitted to win. can be detected, which makes it possible to improve security.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, images are displayed on a display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, etc.), and light is emitted by various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.). Various effects are performed using the output of the sound, the output of sound from the speakers (for example, the speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are performance execution means that execute the performance. The content of the performance executed by the performance execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can serve as a performance content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for performance is extracted separately from the random number value for internal lottery. When the random number value for production is extracted, the production content determining means determines the production to be executed this time from among the multiple types of production content associated with the internal winning combination (or according to predetermined conditions). decide.

Next, when the performance content is determined by the performance content determining means, the performance execution means executes a corresponding performance in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when determining whether or not there is a prize. Execute. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing the performance contents associated with the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at, the order of pressing to be performed, etc.) is determined. The player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict what the player can do, which can increase the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to play a game by displaying a plurality of symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp which symbol is placed at which position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Note that, as long as such an objective is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used as an example.

In the symbol arrangement table, symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotational direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is defined. Further, data for specifying the type of symbol (for example, a symbol code) is associated with each symbol position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". Note that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-2. Design combination]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols influences the game result. That is, the pachislot machine 1 grants various benefits, transitions from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transitions from the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. This makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such symbol combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such combinations of symbols is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14), which will be described later, is used as an example. ing.

In the symbol combination table, data indicating the types of predetermined symbol combinations among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on the active line (for example, "display combination" or "winning activation flag") is defined. ing. Note that the symbols constituting each symbol combination can be specified using, for example, the above-mentioned symbol code. Furthermore, data indicating the type of bonus (for example, "payout, etc.") is associated with each symbol combination. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. Note that the number of types of symbol combinations, the content of benefits, etc. can be changed and defined as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that which symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) influences the game result. That is, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combinations that can be displayed (or the types of benefits that can be awarded)) prior to (in advance) the player's stop operation. It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102. Note that various data configurations can be adopted as long as such an objective is achieved, but in this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table includes data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may vary depending on the set value. Further, types of symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (corresponding to) are associated with each internal winning combination. In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process of this embodiment (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a numerical value range predetermined by the random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) are sequentially added and updated with the lottery values defined corresponding to each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed or not). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is made to win (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if no winning combination exceeds 65535 even after making this determination for all internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game will be a "lose". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability), various methods can be used for the lottery processing. For example, the extracted random numbers are updated by sequential subtraction with the lottery values specified corresponding to each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (the lottery result underflows) is updated. The internal winning combination may be determined by determining the internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability that an internal winning combination with a larger prescribed lottery value is determined (winning probability) becomes higher. Note that the winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "Lottery value specified for each winning number/Number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. Stop control]
As mentioned above, in the pachislot machine 1, the game result is determined by which symbol combination is finally displayed by the player's stop operation among the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning combination. It is a specification that affects the. In other words, the Pachislot machine 1 determines the final display based on not only the determined internal winning combination type but also the player's stop operation timing and press order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be displayed. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp the manner in which the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the manner in which the player performs the stop operation. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying the mode of such stop control. Note that as long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, but in this embodiment, as an example, a stop table, a pull-in priority table (not shown), etc. are used. There is.

In the stop table, data indicating the movement amount of symbols (for example, "number of sliding pieces") is defined for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle region of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that in the predetermined stop table, the number of sliding pieces specified by the symbol position data "0" is "4". Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (the position of the symbol position data "4") (the scheduled stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding pieces) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control."

The attraction priority table contains data indicating which symbol combination should be preferentially displayed (drawn) when there are multiple symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed (for example, "Attraction priority order"). ”) are stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination has been determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination allows the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table is set such that symbol combination B is displayed preferentially than symbol combination A. It is assumed that the order of priority is specified. Next, it is assumed that a stopping operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position is "0".

Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, "4") including the stop start position, the main control circuit 100 determines whether the symbols constituting symbol combination A and the symbols constituting symbol combination B are Search to see if it exists. If both symbols are not present, the position to stop is determined according to predetermined rules (for example, to stop at a closer position, to stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination A, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If there are only symbols constituting symbol combination B, it is determined to stop at a position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, symbol combination B is displayed preferentially than symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at a position corresponding to the symbols constituting symbol combination B. In addition, the pull-in priority may be stored for all symbol positions while the target reel is rotating, or when a stop operation is performed on the target reel, according to the selected pull-in priority table. When the symbol is moved, each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces including the stop start position may be stored. Moreover, such a data structure is also just an example. Furthermore, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally referred to as "control control."

In addition, in this embodiment, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which the stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first, perform "table control" to temporarily determine the stopping position, then perform "control control" to search for a more suitable stopping position, and change the stopping position depending on the search results. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that executes stop control that enables this.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the active line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", the combination of symbols related to any replay role, the combination of symbols related to the minor role, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus role ultimately falls on the active line. It will never be displayed. It should be noted that the "loss" can be considered as one of the internal winning combinations, or it can be taken as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination has been determined.

The second element is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (the pressed position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set at four symbols, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process, display is permitted. If the symbols constituting a symbol combination are arranged over four symbols on an active line (or each active line if there are multiple symbols), depending on the timing of the player's stop operation, the combination of symbols may be may not be displayed. This is called a "missing point."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operated the stop button). For example, in this embodiment, there are cases where an internal winning combination is determined in which a combination of multiple symbols is associated, and in this case, the combinations of symbols are finally displayed on the active line according to the order in which the symbols are pressed. The combination of symbols may change. In addition, such an internal winning combination is called a ``push order'', and if it is a replay win, it is sometimes called a ``push order replay'', and if it is a small win, it is called a ``push order small win''. It is sometimes called.

[4-5. Game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage for the player or to achieve the intended playability. An example of the gaming state will be explained below.

[4-5-1. Bonus status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus winning combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is displayed on an active line, it is possible to shift to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such a bonus state is not provided. Further, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is also possible to configure a plurality of bonus states. When a bonus combination is won, a state (carryover state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." Further, such a carryover state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags" or "inside (bonus)."

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode of the small winning combination (including the probability of winning, its contents, and the mode of stop control, etc.; the same applies hereinafter) compared to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Since it is also a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can also be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include the first class special bonus (RB), the bonus continuous activation device (BB) related to the first class special bonus, and the second type special bonus (CB) (but not a carryover role) , an accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and a regular accessory (SB) (however, it is not a carryover winning combination). Further, for example, the bonus status corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of wins (for example, the upper limit is 8) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12) are played. configured. The BB state is a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when a predetermined number of medals is paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153) or when a player wins an RB or SB during the MB state. Ru. The SB state is configured as a gaming state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition for the bonus state is not limited to only that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory is in operation, when the accessory continuous operating device (BB) related to the first class special accessory starts operating, It is also possible to configure the first type special bonus (RB) to be automatically activated at the start of a game when the item is not in operation, or when the first type special bonus is finished being activated. That is, it is also possible to control the RB so that it is always in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the RB. Here, the RB in BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and a specification in which the RB in BB operation is automatically activated in this way is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Further, while the BB is in operation, control can be performed such that the RB is in operation when a combination of symbols related to the prescribed RB is displayed on the active line. A specification in which the RB operates based on the display of corresponding symbol combinations in this manner is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC" or the like. Further, the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) related to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB) is also the same. In other words, without specifying the combination of symbols related to CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation while the MB is in operation, or it is possible to control the combination of symbols related to the specified CB while the MB is in operation. It is also possible to control so that the CB is activated when the combination is displayed on the valid line.

[4-5-2. RT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the RT state (activating the RT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an RT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which it is possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination compared to a state where the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is a lottery mode that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a gaming state that is more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode (especially the probability of winning) of the replay winning combination is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or "high probability replaying state", and the lottery of the replay winning combination is An RT state in which the aspect (particularly the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as a "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

For example, the RT state can be transitioned by satisfying any of the following transition conditions. Further, when providing a plurality of RT states, the same applies to the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) When a specific symbol combination is displayed when the winning is not in BB or MB (not carried over) and the player is not in RB, BB or MB state. When a predetermined number of games are played after the transition conditions are met.

[4-5-3. AT status]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of transitioning to the AT state (activating the AT state) when predetermined transition conditions are met. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that such an AT state is not provided. Further, it is also possible to configure a plurality of AT states. For example, the AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), because when the player wins the above-mentioned push order combination, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. This is a gaming state configured as a state.

In addition, if multiple AT states are provided, the gaming period of each AT state (including the ease of extension if the said period can be extended (also referred to as "add-on"; the same shall apply hereinafter)), The degree of advantage for the player can be varied by making the types of winning combinations for which stop operation information is reported or the probability of occurrence of stop operation information being reported different. Furthermore, the conditions for transition and termination of the AT state can be set as appropriate depending on the gameplay (excluding termination by execution of limit processing, which will be described later). Further, the AT state may be treated in the same way as the above-mentioned bonus state, and in this case, it may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the playing period in the AT state may be managed by the number of games (number of games) as long as the period is managed appropriately (game number management), and the predetermined number of games is one set, and the number of sets is (number of sets management). Alternatively, the control may be performed based on the number of payouts or the net increase (difference number) during the AT state (payout number management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed based on the number of times (navi frequency) that notifications that affect the payout of medals (for example, push order navigation when winning a push order small winning combination) are performed in the AT state (navi number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Further, the gaming period given when transitioning to the AT state and the gaming period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Furthermore, when providing a plurality of AT states, they may be managed using the same management method or may be managed using different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART status]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when predetermined transition conditions are met, it is possible to transition to the ART state (activate the ART state), which is a combination of the above-described high RT state and AT state. In other words, the ART state means an AT state performed in a high RT state, so at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and a transition to a high RT state (or a transition to a low RT state) is performed. The basic control is the same as the AT state (high RT as a result of being informed of information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player). (or if transition to a low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition conditions for the ART state are met, the transition to the AT state may be made first, and then the transition to the high RT state may be performed to transition to the ART state, or the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously transitioned ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting to the ART state (substantially simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming status]
Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 can also provide game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode in the advantageous section (see FIGS. 5 and 6), which will be described later, is also a state in which the player plays a game, and the advantage is whether or not to shift to the AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be varied, these can be considered as gaming states. Further, from a similar viewpoint, for example, a gaming state can be provided in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus winning combination is won (carried over), a gaming state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination is likely to be displayed due to stop control, and a combination of symbols related to the bonus winning combination are relatively By providing a gaming state that is less likely to be displayed, the player's degree of advantage can be varied. Furthermore, for example, a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) is provided. It is also possible to configure the system so that the degree of advantage for the player can be varied.

In addition, the following methods can be used to change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether to extend the playing period of the AT state; the same applies hereinafter). You can also. For example, a "specific combination" may be determined as the internal winning combination. The number of medals awarded for the specific combination changes depending on the player's stop operation mode (may be the stop operation timing, the order of the presses, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out; if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect answer), 1 coin or no coins will be paid out).

Then, if you win the specific combination in a specific gaming state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to change the advantageous degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game to an advantageous one. No decision is made (which may include a decision as to whether or not to move directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the playing period in the AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific winning combination is won in the above-mentioned specific gaming state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous determination is made in the current game. On the other hand, if eight coins have not been paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game using a specific gaming method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and cases where the advantageous decision is not made (there is a restriction on the occurrence of an advantageous decision). It can also be configured so that there are cases where the Please note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, there is a risk that the (next) player will be at a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not continue from the next game onwards. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game sections as states in which the game is performed with a concept different from the above-mentioned game state. An example of the game section will be explained below. Note that the gaming section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Unfavorable section)
The non-advantageous period is configured as a gaming period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is not possible to inform the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state is not possible.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in an advantageous section (in other words, a predetermined value that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous section (for example, the number of advantageous section games counter and the number of advantageous section payout counters described below) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state. Note that by referring to the predetermined value, if the predetermined value is a specific updated value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set based on that. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is met during an advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if a lottery is configured to end the advantageous section and the winner wins), then A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the processing related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether to move to the advantageous section, etc.) can only be performed with reference to the determined internal winning combination, and the derived It is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the result display (symbol combination) or the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). In addition, to determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or to check the sub-flag (multiple winning combinations) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. It is also possible to refer to data that indirectly indicates an internal winning combination, such as one data to be determined.
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section as the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section after the setting change to be the non-advantageous section B, and so on.

(Advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. Note that the requirements below are just examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or made stricter, it can be changed as appropriate.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stopping operation mode (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) When the setting value is changed (setting change) or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is satisfied, an advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described below is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode), etc.) , it is possible to perform not only processing that refers to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in an advantageous section. . In addition, other examples of various parameters that can be referenced include, for example, benefit information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, types of bonus states, types of RT states, and timing of stop operation of any reel. , or the order in which they are pressed.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a normal state which is disadvantageous for the player, a CZ state where it is easy to shift to the AT state, or an AT state where the expected value of medal increase is positive when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification. Further, for example, in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, a CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to a decision to transition to the AT state, or in the normal state or the CZ state, the system may be set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state, and a precursor effect suggesting transition to the AT state may be performed. States such as the AT precursor state can also be set according to the gameplay.
(6) It is possible to notify that you are in an advantageous section by lighting the section lamp (status display section) that can notify you whether you are in an unfavorable section or an advantageous section (if the section lamp is off) (It is possible to notify that the vehicle is in a non-advantageous section.) Note that, as described above, the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to a certain arbitrary timing. Basically, the lights may start turning on when the transition is from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, and may continue to be turned on until the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. However, if the advantageous section to which the switch has been transferred is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, but the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. Note that if the transitional advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent the gambling aspect from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, an upper limit (restriction) is set on the period during which the advantageous section continues continuously. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Furthermore, in the present embodiment, ending the advantageous section using such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or operation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(Number of games limiter)
The number of games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of games (number of games played) in an advantageous period reaches "1500". For example, an advantageous period game counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous period starts, and increases the count by 1 each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section game counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly played (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of games for which the game number limiter operates can be set to any number of games as long as the number of games is less than or equal to the upper limit of "1500". Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of games during the advantageous period.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limit process when the number of medals paid out during an advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter described below starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time a medal is paid out, the corresponding number of medals is paid out (more specifically, the net increase is calculated by subtracting the number of bets from the number of medals paid out). (several minutes) Add the count. Then, based on the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forcibly given (for example, even if the playing period in the AT state remains). It is terminated and moved to a non-advantageous section. Note that the number of payouts at which the payout number limiter operates can be set to any number of payouts that is less than or equal to the upper limit of "2400". Further, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are to be relaxed or made stricter, they can be changed accordingly. Further, the gambling nature may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

In addition, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described below takes the point where the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section as the lowest point (starting point), and counts the positive amount from the latest lowest point. (In other words, if there is no payout, the count is subtracted, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes the limit process when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous period (for example, when the AT state starts). It can also be configured as a limiter. Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter described later may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the number of bets is not subtracted from the payout number) instead of the above-mentioned net increase number.

Note that the pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter, may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of payouts limiter, and may execute limit processing for advantageous sections using only the number of games limiter and the number of payouts. The advantageous section limit processing may be executed using both number limiters. Note that when both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous section when the operating condition for either limiter is satisfied after the start of the advantageous section.

Further, the type of limiter is not limited to the above-mentioned game number limiter and payout number limiter. For example, the number of navigation times for the small winning combination in the push order during the AT state (that is, the number of times information on a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified regarding the winning combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number of times (for example, "400" times). A navigation number limiter may be provided that executes the limit process when the number of times the navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute the limit process using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the bonus state and turned off based on the end of the bonus state, the external data display device will also be able to do this. You can perform effects during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the completion of the MB state, and the external signal 2 is turned off based on the completion of the MB state, not only the above-mentioned bonus state effect will be performed on the external data display device, but also the bonus state will be displayed. You can count the number of times by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the end of the AT state, the external data display device can also In conjunction with this, it is possible to perform effects during the AT state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is turned on. If the external signal 2 is turned on based on the start of a specific AT state, and turned off based on the end of a specific AT state, the external data display will also be able to display the information during the above AT state. In addition to performing performances, it is also possible to count the number of ATs by type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the first set of AT state, and from the second set onwards, the set is started. If the external signal 2 is turned on each time the AT state is hit, the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can be counted on an external data display. Note that the timing of turning on and turning off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, various conditions can be adopted for the period from the off state to the on state and then to the off state again, such as a predetermined time, one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to be able to transmit a plurality of types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and it is required that communication be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the status of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200. An example of such a command will be explained below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify setting values, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Further, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command is configured to include parameters that specify internal winning combinations, gaming conditions, and the like. Further, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command is configured to include parameters that specify the contents of the lock performance. Further, for example, when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter specifying that rotation of the reels has started.

Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters that specify the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning activation flag) is determined, a winning activation command is transmitted. The winning activation command is configured to include parameters that specify the type of display combination, the content of the bonus to be awarded, and the like. Further, for example, when starting an advantageous section, an advantageous section start command is transmitted. The advantageous section start command is configured to include parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous section, the mode (gaming state), and the like. Further, for example, when ending an advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command is configured to include parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a payment operation is performed, a payment command is transmitted. The payment command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of returns and the like. Note that these are just examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as needed, and unnecessary commands among these can also be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. Performance]
As mentioned above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various performances are performed using various production devices in order to increase the interest of the game, to provide useful information to the player, or to achieve the intended gameplay. It is now possible. An example of such a performance will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side performance]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side), the following effects can be performed, for example. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify information on a stop operation using the instruction monitor, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Rock performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the player's game operation for a predetermined period). Such a performance is called a "rock performance (or simply "rock")" or a "freeze performance (or simply "freeze")." Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a rock effect is not performed, or to allow a plurality of types of rock effects to be performed.

Further, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or another operation. For example, if the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, if the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period after the start operation is performed. In addition, when providing multiple types of lock effects, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (period for invalidating the player's game operations), the type of game operations to be invalidated, etc. are set for each lock effect. All you have to do is make it so.

(Reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, the performance display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only a variable display mode but also a combination with a stop display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. (including). Such a presentation is called a "reel presentation" and also a "symbol presentation." It should be noted that it may be configured so that such reel effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (performing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a reel effect is performed and cases where a reel effect is not performed.

In short, reel production is to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each reel 3L, 3C, 3R without the player's gaming operation during a period when the player's gaming operation is invalidated. It is a performance that will be performed. Therefore, it is possible to set a movement pattern for performing such a performance movement without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding pieces, etc. Furthermore, by setting a plurality of movement patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effect patterns can be set. Note that only one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for reel production.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that causes a pseudo game to be played during the above-described lock effect can be performed. Such performances are called "pseudo games." It should be noted that the system can be configured so that such pseudo games are not performed, or it can be configured so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. In addition, the phrase "performing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where a pseudo game is not performed.

In short, a pseudo game is a process in which a player's game operation is accepted in a pseudo manner during a period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, and thereby the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated or stopped (temporarily stopped). The performance is performed by doing things like this. That is, the reel performance described above is performed by further intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. For this reason, it is inherently undesirable to use it for any other purpose. However, in a simulated game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he or she is playing an actual game.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be explained using an example. For example, the pseudo game is performed in the following manner.
(1) Actual start operation by the player (here the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game starts)
(2) Each reel rotates in a pseudo manner (during a pseudo game)
(3) Receive a pseudo-stop operation, which causes each reel to temporarily stop (during pseudo-gaming)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts rotating (the pseudo game ends and the actual game starts)

Note that random delay processing is, for example, when specific symbols are displayed side by side in the situation (3) above, and when each reel starts rotating normally in the situation (4) above, the player In some cases, it becomes easier to stop using a specific symbol as a landmark (helping with so-called "eye pushing"), so in order to correct this, a delay period is randomly assigned to each reel. This is a process for starting rotation after generation (such a delay period is also referred to as a "relocation period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must be set to the specified value so that it is not mistakenly recognized as completely stopped. It is desirable that the reels alternate between forward and reverse directions for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, if any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the situation (3) above (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all reels are temporarily stopped), In the above-mentioned situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swinged) up and down until the random delay process is started. In addition, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging will not occur when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops. You may also do so.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo game lamp is installed to notify that a pseudo game is in progress, and after a pseudo game is started in the situation (1) above, ), the pseudo game lamp may be turned on until the random delay process is started. Note that it is desirable that the pseudo game lamp be installed at a position above the operation section that accepts game operations from the player and at a position where it can be visually recognized during the game. Further, the pseudo game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo game lamp is covered with a monochrome edge. Further, it is desirable that the display range of the pseudo game lamp including the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo game lamp includes a description that allows the user to recognize that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp for notifying that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", or " It is preferable that the reel should have a description such as ``Reel automatic production in progress'', and it is desirable that such a written part should occupy 1/3 or more of the surface area. It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 or the sub control circuit 200 that controls the pseudo game lamp.

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-gaming display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress may be displayed after the pseudo-gaming is started in the situation (1) above. ) The main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started in the situation described in (). Note that it is desirable that the pseudo-gaming display be displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's gaming operations, and in a position where it can be viewed during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are located above the operating section, so any one may be used). Additionally, the pseudo-game display, including the explanatory part, must have a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area must exceed 642 square mm). , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area should preferably be 8.2% or more of the entire screen). In addition, the explanatory part of the pseudo-gaming display includes descriptions that make it clear that the pseudo-gaming display is a display to notify that a pseudo-gaming is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY", "simulating game production in progress", etc.). It is also desirable that the size of the reel is such that it can be read by the player without being obscured.

Also, for example, during a pseudo game (for example, from the start of the pseudo game in the situation (1) above to the start of the random delay process in the situation (4) above), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure the system so that the information on the stop operation is not notified (if it is necessary to display the information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from mistakenly believing that he is playing an actual game during a simulated game. Furthermore, if any of the above-mentioned measures is taken, even if the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220) is configured to notify information about the stop operation during the pseudo game. good. Similarly, during the simulated game, the sub performance device may perform a performance according to the game result of the simulated game (in conjunction with the simulated game operation).

In addition, in the actual game, a test signal corresponding to the player's game operation or the state in which the game operation is possible is output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, but during the pseudo game In this case, the test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is not output. Therefore, during the pseudo game, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be outputted so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo game is being played. Note that when the first interface board 301 for the test machine receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side performs the pseudo game signal. The game may be progressed (that is, the first interface board 301 for the test machine may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). Further, when the first interface board 301 for the test machine is provided with such a pseudo game progression function, a changeover switch that can turn the function on and off may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the production content of the pseudo game in the certification test (sight shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, the following effects can be performed, for example, under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side). Note that, as described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 allows the main display device 210 and the like to notify information about a stop operation, but this is also included in performance in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed that is completed in the current game (that is, completed in one game). Such a performance is called a "normal performance" or a "single performance". It should be noted that it may be configured so that such normal effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of normal effects can be performed.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such a performance is called a "continuous reading performance" or a "continuous performance". Note that it is possible to configure the system so that such a continuous performance is not performed, or to perform a plurality of types of continuous performance.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a performance can be performed in which the content of the performance can be changed according to a performance operation by a player. Such a performance is called an "operation-linked performance" and is also called a "button performance" or the like. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that such operation-linked effects are not performed, or it may be configured such that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Further, the operation-linked performance can be configured as a normal performance or as a continuous performance. Furthermore, the performance operations can include not only operations on the performance button group, but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or inform setting values, internal winning combinations, game status, game sections, award details of benefits, period until benefits are awarded, etc. Further, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Furthermore, these uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can also perform performances other than the various performances described above. For example, various types of notifications to players or game parlors (for example, notifications to prevent addiction, notifications to prevent forgotten items, error status notifications, demo status notifications, etc.) that are used for purposes other than those mentioned above are also included in production in a broad sense. . Note that the addictive prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. In addition, the forgotten item prevention notification may be such that, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a payment operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating this fact is notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the time the error occurs until the error is resolved. In addition, the demo status notification may be such that when a predetermined period of time has elapsed during which no games have been played or when a payment operation has been performed, it is possible to notify that the machine is empty.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of specifications regarding the gaming performance of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine." It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and Some or all of the various specifications and functions described as another gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to the first gaming machine in this embodiment. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Further, in the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as gaming states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between the 2BB flag where "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-card bet state, hereinafter simply referred to as "2BB") described later is carried over, and the period between the 2BB flags described below. Between the 3BB flag where "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when 3 cards are bet.Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over, and when no bonus role is won (carryover). (not flagged) and non-flags. Further, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that transitions in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state that transitions to in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB. Ru.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2-bet state) and with three medals bet (3-bet state). There is. Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 5 in order to play a game, and that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b. This includes both the placing of two or three medals from the credits, and the automatic placing of two or three medals as a result of winning a replay combination.

[5-1. Game performance of first gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. In addition, FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays the game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section further includes a performance section (advantageous section/normal game) and an advantageous section. An increased section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus) will be provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not reported, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT state) in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, but as will be described later. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition occurs.

In other words, the non-advantageous section is set as an initial state that is controlled when a game in the advantageous section ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the factory shipment is made. The production section is a control state as a normal state in which the expectation level of increasing section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition etc., and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increase period is a gaming state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the number of medals. Note that both the effect section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by mutually transitioning these sections, they are configured as a series of advantageous sections.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section sub-flag is set as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later). is determined. Note that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various types of lottery related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous sections) performed by the main control circuit 100. This is information that allows groups to be identified by grouping and assigning the same information. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, so the amount of data can be compressed and the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery is performed using the non-advantageous section sub-flag.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Repbell" has internal winning combinations of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell123A1" to "F_Bell321B2". ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_confirmed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section as well, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag may be determined in the same way as in the advantageous section. Furthermore, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is used as secondary information (sub-flag) according to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) in an advantageous section. is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning time sub-flags and advantageous section winning time sub-flags.

The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is one of "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Weak Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The advantageous section winning sub-flag "confirmed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach" (No. "8"). . The advantageous section winning sub-flag "Naka Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag ``Rip 1'' at the time of advantageous section winning is set to ``Right This is determined when the combination of symbols of ``Up Rip'' is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is ``Rip Up Right''). The sub-flag "Tori Rip 2" when winning an advantageous section is "Parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). This is determined when the symbol combination of "Rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel Rip").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the combination of "Rip to the right" symbols is not possible between the 3BB flags. A combination of "parallel rep" symbols is displayed between 2BB flags and between non-flags.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Toru Reply 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section between 3BB flags, and between 2BB flags and between non-flags. When winning a prize in a section, "Toru Rep 2" is determined as a sub-flag. In the first gaming machine, when the advantageous section winning time sub-flags are different in this way, various lotteries described later (for example, pseudo-bonus transfer lottery using the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is played as a winning combination in which the sub-flag changes depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. ) is described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flag changes when winning an advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control will be different depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a role, the number of medals paid out does not change (or may be changed), and the combinations of symbols displayed are different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

For example, as described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (non-flag) it is between, the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressed position is not appropriate, the combination of "Watermelon Spills" will be displayed as the result will be missed. When winning a prize, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the prize can be won without any loss or loss. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the stop operation is predefined) between the 3BB flags. If it is performed in any of the following manners: the pressing order (the correct pressing order), the appropriate pressing position (timing of the stop operation), or a combination of these, the The symbol combination of "Parallel Rip" will be displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, the symbol combination of "Rip to the right" will be displayed, and this will determine the sub-flag when winning a different advantageous section. You can do it like this. Then, depending on the difference in the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, the degree of advantage in various lotteries described later may be varied.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the gaming state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these regarding the specific combination, All modes that allow different secondary information to be determined depending on different stop display modes, thereby making it possible to vary the degree of advantage, can be applied.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery to move to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing, a destination mode etc. is determined according to the non-gaming section sub-flag. In addition, when making this determination, there are cases where only the type of mode when moving to an advantageous section is determined ("advantageous section start" in Figure 5), and cases where not only the type of mode but also a shift to a pseudo bonus is determined. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start + pseudo bonus start"). However, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which a transition to a pseudo bonus is not determined in a non-advantageous period.

Here, each mode in the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIG. 6. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may also be referred to as a gaming state or a control state) for varying the expectation level of transition (granting) to an increased section (pseudo bonus) in a presentation section (normal game). Yes, in the performance section (normal game), it is determined whether or not to transfer to a pseudo bonus according to this mode, it is decided to maintain an advantageous section, or it is decided to end an advantageous section and move to a non-advantageous section. It is supposed to be done.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is easy to stay in when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). 7 (c)), and the expectation level of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). Although not shown, in the start mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." The ceiling number of games is used to force the transition to the pseudo bonus when the period of not transitioning to the pseudo bonus reaches a certain period. Therefore, the fewer the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous it is to the player, and the greater the number of ceiling games, the disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, A mode is the easiest mode for players to stay in when playing games, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, and the expectation level of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c in Figure 7 below)). ), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). Note that in the normal A mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games." In addition, in FIG. 6, "approximately 999G after the pseudo bonus" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, the mode shifts to end A mode or end B mode, which will be described later, and in that mode, 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus. If a game is played and the normal A mode is selected when transitioning from the non-advantageous period to the advantageous period after the game has been played and the period has shifted to the non-advantageous period, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + End A The game period in mode or end B mode is "32 games" + the number of games required to transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, so this is expressed. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

Normal B mode is relatively easy for players to stay in while playing games, and although it is a relatively disadvantageous mode, it is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the expectation level for shifting to pseudo bonuses is This is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 described later), and the degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later). Note that in the normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In the heaven preparation mode, although the expectation level of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "466 games", and when transitioning to a pseudo bonus After that, it is certain that the mode will shift to heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to 222 games, so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode that is easy to stay in if you transition to a pseudo-bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends, and there is no expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. The degree of expectation for shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later). In the termination A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than end A mode, because it is easy to stay if you move to a pseudo bonus and do not move to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after it ends. mode, the expectation level to shift to a pseudo bonus mode is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) described below), and the expectation level to shift to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see Figure 7 (discussed below)). (See 8(f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, if 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

The guarantee mode is a mode to stay in when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation level for transitioning to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is "32 games". In that sense, it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the level of expectation for transition to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode that maintains (guarantees) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode may include the extension (addition) of pseudo bonuses in a row (if the AT state continues due to a decision to extend (addition) made during the AT state). The same applies hereafter), the expectation level for transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode with a moderate probability that the mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may be set differently. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so that , or the lottery value can be simply set so that the higher the set value is, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate is. The same applies to heaven B mode and heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo-bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation of transitioning to pseudo-bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. ”, and is a relatively advantageous mode with a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). In other words, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which you can expect pseudo-bonuses to be played consecutively, and the expectation level for transitioning to pseudo-bonuses is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is 32 games. '', and the probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Note that heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that each of the above-mentioned modes is just an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-mentioned modes may be set, or some of the above-mentioned modes may not be set.

Furthermore, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to shift to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to make a specification such as ``increasing the rate of increase'', or a specification in which the non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increasing section. By doing this, an incentive is created to play games even in a state where it is determined that the area is not advantageous, such as after a setting change, and therefore, there is an incentive to start playing games even when the store opens. In addition, even if the section lamp stops lighting after 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous situation will occur, so even in such a case, there is no incentive to continue playing. becomes. In addition, up to this point, we have explained that the production section is a gaming state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, there are disadvantageous aspects (for example, reducing the frequency of notifications, (such as changing the winning combination), the game state may be such that information on a stop operation is notified.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to transfer to a pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to transfer from the current game to a pseudo bonus, and " "Winning (next game)" means transitioning to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if a "win (current game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the current game, and if a "win (next game)" is determined, the game will be played at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the invalid period, a reel performance ("Red 7 set" performance) in which "Red 7" symbols are displayed in a row on the main display window 4 is performed. , in a game where a pseudo bonus has started and a "red 7" effect is performed, if it is necessary to notify information on a stop operation, at least the invalid period has ended and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. The information on the stop operation is notified when (it may be before, but not before the above-described random delay process is started).

In the production section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. In addition, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus and the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and mode transfer lottery described below. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) are not performed.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay" In a game in which a player wins in "B"), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 7(c), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag rather than "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. The percentage of cases where it is decided to shift to pseudo bonuses is higher. However, the manner in which "Toru Reply 2" is given preferential treatment than "Toru Reply 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where "Toripu 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability; In such a case, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a pseudo bonus.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Further, as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), it is determined to transfer to the pseudo bonus, and if the mode transfer lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transfer lottery (at the time of ceiling), which will be described later, will not be performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f), "Toripu 2" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag rather than "Toripu 1" is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. In this case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a mode relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the manner in which "Toru Reply 2" is given preferential treatment than "Toru Reply 1" is not limited to this. For example, in the case where ``Pass 2'' is determined as the advantageous section winning sub-flag, it may be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but the advantageous section winning sub-flag may be `` In the case where it is determined that the game mode is 1, it may not be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the performance section (normal game), if it is not determined to transfer to a pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (either addition method or subtraction method is fine), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the ceiling number of games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that a "win (current game)" is determined, or it is also possible to make sure that a "win (next game)" is determined. Further, any of these may be determined by lottery.

In the performance section (normal game), when the number of games reaches the ceiling and it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processes related to the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest of the processing content is the same, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. It can be controlled using In addition, the processes related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) are the same except for the type of sub-flag, so they use the same lottery table and control flow. can be controlled.

In addition, if "Win (this game)" is not set as the type of winning of the pseudo bonus, at the timing when the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous section winning sub-flag has already been determined, and, Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo bonus transfer lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo bonus transfer processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed all at once. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be performed all at once.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine. As mentioned above, when it is decided to shift to a pseudo bonus in the performance section (normal game) and the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the transition to the increase section (pseudo bonus) occurs. . In addition, as mentioned above, in the performance section (normal game), if the end A mode or end B mode is controlled and 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in Figure 5, the "Advantage section ends" (via Ends A and B)"), then shift to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are satisfied, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated ("end of advantageous section (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Shift to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling reduction lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus, depending on the current mode. In (e) of Figure 8, "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. , means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling reduction lottery may be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to reduce the number of ceiling games, and when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have 1G continuous stock described below, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the ceiling number of games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game moves to the performance section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is determined to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, when the pseudo bonus ends, "0 games" is set as the ceiling number of games. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of games reaches the ceiling, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increased section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "determined hand" or "medium Che" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that the destination mode may also be determined when an advantageous section winning sub-flag other than the above is determined, but in this case, as a general rule, a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode is selected. In order to avoid being determined as the previous mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) may be referred to.

In the increased section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 8(f) is referred to, and the destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag. In this case, as above, in order to prevent a mode that is relatively disadvantageous than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is based on the lottery value. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referred to.

In the increasing section (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate a 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag or the advantageous section winning sub-flag. be done. In addition, in (d) of Figure 7, "non-winning" means that 1G series will not be generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G series (1G series stock) is 1 piece. It means that it is given (the 1G continuous stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be awarded during one pseudo bonus. Furthermore, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous stocks can be awarded in one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G continuous stock), one 1G continuous stock is used up (the 1G continuous stock counter is (subtracted by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. Note that in this case, since a pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G continuous stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G continuous stock), and if you have not won the ceiling reduction lottery described above, The number of ceiling games is set according to the current mode (in the case of end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games is temporarily set here. ), the pseudo bonus ends ("pseudo bonus end" in FIG. 5), and the transition to the performance section (normal game) occurs.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G continuous stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will take priority, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G continuous stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G continuous stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry forward the fact that there is ceiling shortening.

In the first gaming machine, as an example of the structure of the increase period (pseudo bonus), the structure continues for "55 games" and a maximum of 275 coins can be acquired, but the structure of the pseudo bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)" is also installed, which is a pseudo bonus that lasts for "22 games" and can earn up to 110 coins. You can do it like this. In this case, when it is decided to transfer to a pseudo bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transfer lottery, when the ceiling is reached, and in the 1G consecutive lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo BB") RB or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, in 50% increments). Note that "pseudo RB" may have a different value from "pseudo BB" (more specifically, it has lower value than "pseudo BB"), so for example, the number of consecutive games may be different from "pseudo BB". BB", but by setting the BellNavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information) to a low value, it is possible to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be acquired and make the value different. In addition, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel performance in which "BAR" symbols are displayed all together on the main display window 4, or a reel performance in which "Red 7-Red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. Just do it like this. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to one configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continued games (game period) can be changed.

Additionally, if the conditions for executing the limit process shown in FIG. 16 (described later) are met during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated (in FIG. 5, "end of advantageous section due to limit process"). ), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous section.

In the first gaming machine, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-bet bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are not performed, and The number of ceiling games is also not updated. Furthermore, if a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the medals are configured not to increase in the two bet state, so the period during the pseudo bonus does not become an increasing period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets.

Here, when a game is played with two bets, the lottery regarding the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) is used. (various lotteries) and processing (for example, updating the number of ceiling games) will not be performed, but the above-mentioned advantageous section game number counter for the number of games limiter and the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter for the payout number limiter will be updated. It is desirable that the These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing the gambling nature by limiting the number of games stayed in the advantageous section and the upper limit of the number of coins acquired, so even if two coins are bet, these counters will not be updated. If this is the case, there will be cases where the number of stay games and the number of coins won will exceed the upper limit of the set advantageous zone due to intervening games with two bets, and as a result, it may not be possible to appropriately suppress the gambling nature. It's to get it. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counter be configured to be able to be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described flow of the game is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. It will not be played, and the number of ceiling games will not be updated. In addition, if a bonus state occurs during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than the non-bonus state (more specifically, the non-bonus state with 3 bets). , the period during the pseudo bonus may not be an increase period. That is, the first gaming machine is configured so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, the first gaming machine is configured so that it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, a 3-card bet between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game"). In some cases, other states may be described as "non-recommended gaming states"). In other words, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 2BB between the 2BB flags can only be won in a 2-piece bet state, and cannot be won in a 3-piece bet state. The configuration is such that it does not. Furthermore, 3BB is a bonus combination that can only be won in a 3-piece bet state, and the combination of symbols related to 3BB between the 3BB flags is configured such that it can only be won in a 3-piece bet state and not in a 2-piece bet state. Furthermore, there is no case where 3BB is won between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB is won between 3BB flags.

In the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, after winning 2BB in a 2-bet bet state between non-flags (without winning 2BB) and placing it between 2BB flags, a 3-bet bet state is made. If you play the game with , you can play the game in the above-mentioned recommended gaming state without worrying about whether or not you will win the bonus combination.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in FIG. 8(e), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, 1 The probability of winning the ceiling reduction lottery is /8 (32/256), while the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than that, This prevents the number of ceiling games from being shortened.

Note that even in a mode where the number of ceiling games is more than "32 games", the probability that the number of ceiling games is higher (for example, 1/64) than in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games" is may be determined to be shortened.

Further, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you shorten "32 games" to a smaller number of predetermined games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be achieved, so when you win the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of shortened games will be further determined. Alternatively, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance in the ceiling shortening lottery.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the ceiling shortening lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, during the pseudo bonus, a ceiling reduction lottery may be performed for each game. In addition, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guarantee mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. You may also do so. In these cases, the advantageous section winning time sub-flag and the advantageous section winning time sub-flag may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 7(d), it is shown that 1G consecutive stock may be awarded regardless of which mode the current mode is. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling of 32 games or not.

Note that the manner in which the rights are granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode where the number of ceiling games is "32 games", 1G continuous lottery is not performed considering that a ceiling shortening lottery will be performed, and in a mode where the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games". By allowing the 1G consecutive lottery to be performed when , the gambling nature of the game may be prevented from becoming excessively high.

Moreover, the opportunity for performing the 1G lottery is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be used up in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustrations are omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the game machine is in an advantageous state. A special bonus performance to suggest something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus performance is executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if a special bonus effect is executed at the start of a pseudo-bonus, it will be suggested that you are at least staying in heaven mode, and there is also the expectation that you may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, this special bonus performance may be executed with a predetermined probability or with a 100% probability even when a 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning. Various possibilities such as winning only can be suggested, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus) will be controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the end of the advantageous condition (for example, pseudo bonus), , in the case of heaven mode), the period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the playing period of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the case of the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G continuous stock) may restart the advantageous state, so it is possible to increase the player's expectations and improve the interest in the game.

Furthermore, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a "confirmed combination" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning in an advantageous section (i.e., "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_ ``Reach roll'' is determined as an internal winning combination), and if it is determined to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). ), a special rock performance can be performed. Furthermore, even if the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player may also select the "Confirmed winning combination" as the advantageous section winning sub-flag. ” is determined, so if the sub-flag “Middle Che” is determined at the time of winning an advantageous section, it is the same as when “Confirmed hand” is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock performance may be made possible.

Here, since the "confirmed hand" is a hand that also confirms the transition to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can transfer to the pseudo bonus and transition to heaven C mode. It is now possible to recognize that there has been a game, and it has become very interesting for players. The special lock performance is, for example, configured as a performance in which game operations (stop operations) are disabled for approximately 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this time, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in reverse, or a special video etc. that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. You can also do this. Also, special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce effects by combining these. In addition, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be made to continue until the player performs the next game operation (in other words, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled midway through). It is also possible to leave the decision of whether to proceed with the game to the player).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if you stay in heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. , it may be undesirable to perform the above-mentioned special lock effect many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, within a series of advantageous sections, if it is decided to execute a special lock effect for the first time, the special lock effect will be executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions will be applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even if it is established. In addition, the method is that once a special lock effect is executed, information indicating that effect is stored, and if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, the special lock effect is not activated in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the performance may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the performance will be executed. may also be rewritten to indicate that it will not be executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, the upper limit number of times that the special lock effect can be executed may be set as "twice" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be set as appropriate depending on the expected value of balls to be rolled out per special lock effect.

Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is performed upon winning a "confirmed role", and a decision is made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, for example, there are cases where the game enters heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than winning the "confirmed role" (see (f) in Figure 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. A special lock effect will be executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as that triggered by winning a "determined role", or it may be a different probability). It may be determined that the

Furthermore, for example, upon winning a "determined role", it is first decided whether or not a special lock performance will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock performance will be executed, the heaven It may be possible to shift to C mode. In other words, the special lock performance may be executed in response to the decision to move to heaven C mode, or the transition to heaven C mode may be performed in response to the decision to perform the special lock performance. It may also be possible to shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be adopted as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or control game number counter described below is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter described later is less than "1201", , When it is determined whether or not to execute the special lock effect as described above, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described below becomes "750" or more, or When the value of the section payout number counter or the control payout number counter becomes "1201" or more, a decision as to whether or not a special lock performance will be executed is made not to be made in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do that.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16, which will be described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set multiple times, special effects (for example, special lock effects) are set each time. controlled so that it does not occur. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "determined combination") will trigger an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, heaven C mode) may be set. In the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs multiple times, the control is performed so that a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, while suppressing the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, advantageous section winning sub-flag) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information (for example, an advantageous section winning sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. For example, it is possible to determine whether to grant an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stop operation is notified, depending on the determined secondary information. It is assumed that it can be determined.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined but also when a combination of symbols is displayed. It is possible to diversify the gameplay regarding giving.

In addition, the first gaming machine manages both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and amount of information related to provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the betted gaming value is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special prize (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special prize (for example, , 2BB) cannot be won. Further, when the betted game value is the second amount (for example, 2 coins), the second special winning combination is made possible to win, while the first special winning combination is not made possible to win. In addition, when winning a specific combination (for example, "F_Replay A"), if it is in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a predetermined symbol combination (for example, "Rip to the right") is displayed, and If it is in the 2 special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "Parallel Rip") (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed and when a specific symbol combination is displayed. In other words, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on which special permission state is in effect. It is possible to further diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific winning combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to re-gaming, it is considered that re-gaming is activated no matter which one is displayed. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same benefits are provided is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination that is associated with the granting of gaming value. If you win a specific small role, for example, if you are in the first special permission state, you will receive 1 coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any other value below the betted gaming value, or The second special permission In this case, a combination of specific symbols that gives the same number of gaming values as when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed (a combination of symbols that gives a gaming value equivalent to "parallel reply") is displayed. It's okay.

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of symbols that are "missing" (however, in order to make it possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state, a symbol that is different from the case of pure "missing") A combination of symbols may be configured as a combination of distinguishable symbols. Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, even if the same specific combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be varied depending on which special permission state is in place. , it is possible to diversify the gameplay while suppressing an increase in the control load and amount of information regarding the provision of advantageous states. In addition, in games where a specific combination has been determined, the same benefits are granted regardless of which special permission state the player is in, so even if the gameplay is changed, the player is not directly disadvantaged. You can prevent it from getting covered.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner in the second special permission state, and a specific combination of symbols can be displayed. It may be configured such that it is not possible to display a specific combination of symbols when a stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a specific combination of symbols is displayed. If a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state different depending on when a combination of specific symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

In addition, if you win a specific combination, if you are in the first special permission state, a predetermined combination of symbols will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if you are in the second special permission state, you will be able to display the stop operation in a specific manner. When the stop operation is performed, a specific combination of symbols may be displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, a predetermined symbol combination may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "press position ○", "press position correct", etc.). When a specific combination of symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be explained as "pressed position x", "incorrect pressed position", etc.), the specified symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on (the timing of) the player's stop operation, which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, as mentioned above, the specific winning combination can also be configured as a specific small winning combination, and in this case, on at least one reel, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the pressed position is ○), the specific symbol will be displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of gaming values are awarded, and if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressed position is x), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of gaming values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as a symbol combination when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible to not only change the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to change the content of direct benefits, so that the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, on one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation becomes an appropriate stop operation and a specific symbol combination is displayed, and when the timing of the stop operation is other than the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate. When the first specific combination is not and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. , and when the timing is other than the second timing, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed without an appropriate stop operation. What is the second specific combination, and when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing? When the third timing is different, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the stop operation is not appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. A third specific winning combination is provided, and these winnings may be won with the same probability of winning.

In addition, in this case, the specific combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and the specified combination of symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state can be changed depending on the player's stop operation (the procedure), which allows the player to concentrate more on the game and improves the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above, and in this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. It can be configured such that when a value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of an incorrect pressing order), a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same benefit). Further, a predetermined number may be awarded more gaming value than a specific number. Furthermore, the predetermined number may be awarded less gaming value than the specific number. Further, at least one of the specific symbol combination and the predetermined symbol combination may be used as the symbol combination when a missed spot occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (the procedure), but also the details of the direct benefits can be changed, so the player This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and improves the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order will be limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the first stop on the left, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a specific combination of symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop in the center or right, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. When it is the 1st specific combination and the middle 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the left/right 1st stop, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is displayed. When the combination is the 2nd specific combination that is not displayed and the 1st stop on the right, it becomes an appropriate stop operation and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when it is the 1st stop on the left or middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A combination of specific symbols is provided with a third specific combination that is not displayed, and these may be set to win with the same probability of winning.

Up to this point, in a unit game in which a specific winning combination has been won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the process for determining the transition from an unfavorable section to an advantageous section, or an advantageous section. As described above, the determination process regarding the granting of advantageous states (including pseudo bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantageousness of the gaming situation in advantageous sections) will be changed. Among these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may result in disadvantage) can be regarded as the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which an arbitrary effect (warning notification) can be generated to call attention.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, there is a higher possibility that an advantageous state will be given when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It has become. In other words, assuming that 3 coins are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is more preferential than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). It is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, if you win a predetermined combination (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described later), if you are in the first special permission state, you can combine the awarded symbols (for example, 8 pieces payout) regardless of the batting order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, if the batting order is the predefined correct pressing order, the given symbol combination will be displayed, but the batting order is predefined. If it is not the correct pressing order, the combination of awarded symbols will not be displayed and no gaming value will be awarded, or a smaller amount of gaming value will be awarded than if the combination of assigned symbols had been displayed. It is configured so that a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout) is displayed. That is, unless the operation of the advantageous state is taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the granting of gaming value is given more preferential treatment than the second special permission state.

In other words, even if the player is in a non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays a game with a bet of 3 cards between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving an advantageous state will not be given preferential treatment, but the gaming value will be increased when the advantageous state is not activated. Since the granting probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played with a relatively small difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility that the player can rapidly increase the gaming value is reduced, can be defined, for example, as a "stable state."

On the other hand, if the player plays a game in the recommended gaming state, the probability of granting an advantageous state will be treated favorably, but the probability of granting gaming value when the favorable state is not activated will not be treated favorably, so the favorable condition will not be activated. The game can be played in a state where the difference in slope value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which there is a high possibility that the player will be able to rapidly increase the gaming value, but the player's gaming value is likely to decrease can be defined, for example, as a "rough sea state."

Here, the method of creating two states, a stable state and a rough sea state, is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is made higher than in the "rough sea state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is made higher than in the "rough sea state". lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo bonus is lower than in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode is lower than in the "stable state". enhance In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time in a "stable state" but difficult to hit consecutive games, and in a "rough sea state" it is difficult to hit a pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is easy to win consecutive games. This situation can be created. As for the stop control of the predetermined combination, as described above, it may be changed between 2BB flags and between 3BB flags, or it may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between 3BB flags).

[5-2. Design layout configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", " Ten types of symbols, ``White Blank 1'' and ``White Blank 2,'' are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing examples of symbol combination tables of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine. That is, in the following, which symbol is selected depending on the type of internal winning combination drawn in the first gaming machine and the stop operation mode (i.e., batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. We will explain whether the combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in an internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor role. It shows.

“F_2BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), while it can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet. The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_2BB" wins in a 2-bet state, or in a game in which "F_2BB" is a "miss" between the 2BB flags, "BB01" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between two BB flags, "BB01" will not be displayed in a three-bet bet state.

“F_3BB” can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a bet of 3 coins in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but when a game is played with a bet of 2 coins, The structure is such that if the winning combination is determined to be an internal winning combination, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-bet state, or in a game in which "F_3BB" is a "miss" between the 3BB flags, "BB02" will be displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB) will be displayed. (bonus state). On the other hand, even if it is between 3 BB flags, there is no case where "BB02" is displayed in a 2-bet bet state.

In addition, in the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of coins that can be started is only 3 coins). During the 2BB state and 3BB state, the RB, which is a first class special accessory, is always controlled to be in operation (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two winnings occur or two games are played after activation, the RB state is once terminated and activated again. Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the end condition for the 2BB state is stipulated that more than one medal is paid out in the 2BB state, and the end condition for the 3BB state is defined as that more than 176 medals are paid out in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that the amount has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, if the mode in which you entered the bonus state (same as when the bonus state ends, as no mode transition occurs during the bonus state), i.e., the current mode, is "start mode", then the transition destination The mode is "start mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the destination mode will be "normal A mode". Further, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the destination mode is "end A mode". Furthermore, if the current mode is one of "guarantee mode," "heaven A mode," "heaven B mode," and "heaven C mode," the destination mode will be "guarantee mode."

“F_Replay A” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, any one of "REP64" to "REP72" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are "Replay" symbols in a straight line in the lower row or in a straight line in the middle row). Because they are displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel reps." Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower reps," and "REP72" is a "middle rep." ``reply'') is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (this can be called "replay" as it displays the "replay" symbol upward to the right) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

“F_Replay B” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel reply" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state and a replay will be granted.

“F_Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet bet state, if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" will be displayed (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol at the bottom of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "Cherry Rip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is granted.

“F_Confirmed Cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The "cherry" symbol is displayed at the bottom of the left reel 3L, and since symbols such as "REP42" that can increase the player's expectations on other reels are also displayed, these are ) is displayed and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Rep" and "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_middle cherry” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", if the pressed position is ○ for at least left reel 3L, one of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle row cherry reps"), and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Reach” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state, regardless of the number of bets. Note that in a 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in a 2-card bet state, it can be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, in a 2-card bet state, a "middle rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any of "REP01" to "REP14" will be pressed regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customary for players to It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitively notify (or suggest) a transition to an advantageous state, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye reps") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. Furthermore, when the pressing order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle row rep" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is given.

“F_Watermelon” is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these are "watermelon" symbols displayed side by side, so (which can be collectively referred to as "Watermelon") is displayed, and if the bet is on 3 medals, three medals are paid out, and if the bet is on 2 medals, two medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (these can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spills" because the "watermelon" symbols are not displayed side by side) is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to configure so that a missed medal occurs and no medals are paid out.

"F_Bell123A1", "F_Bell123A2", "F_Bell132A1", "F_Bell132A2", "F_Bell213A1", "F_Bell213A2", "F_Bell231A1", "F_Bell231A2", "F_Bell Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A."

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor combination with 6 choices (any one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct pressing order). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, the "lower right bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07"). is displayed, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals are paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell123B1", "F_Bell123B2", "F_Bell132B1", "F_Bell132B2", "F_Bell213B1", "F_Bell213B2", "F_Bell231B1", "F_Bell231B2", "F_Bell ``Bell 312B1'', ``F_Bell 312B2'', ``F_Bell 321B1'', and ``F_Bell 321B2'' are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. Note that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B."

As shown in FIG. 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor combination between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet bet state and the 3-bet bet state. If it is decided as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the bet is 3 medals, 8 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is 2 medals, 2 medals will be paid out. A number of medals will be paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is not pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between non-flags in the 3-bet state, and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is decided as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and 8 medals will be displayed. paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations will have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressed position ○, and the pressed position ○ If so, which one of the winning "one-card combinations" is displayed and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, the remaining stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ○, and if the pressed position is ○, which one of the winning "1-card combinations" will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, medals will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

The "F_RB combination of 8 cards" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight medals are paid out.

The "1 piece F_RB combination" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "1-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 1-card combination will be displayed. medals will be paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence between the internal winning combination, stop operation mode, display combination, etc. shown in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed when the result is a pure "loss", when "BB01" is missed and becomes a "loss", "BB02" can be displayed. In a 3-bet state, when you miss "BB02" and become a "miss", when you become a "miss" due to a 3-bet state between 2BB flags, when a 2-bet state occurs between 3BB flags A "miss" may occur in various situations, such as when a "miss" occurs due to this, or when a "miss" occurs due to a "small winning combination" being missed. Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations that are displayed as "lost" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combination is By allowing these to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the situation, it is also possible to vary the symbol combinations related to "missing" displayed depending on the state or the like.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Each limit process (number of games) and semi-limit process (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of limit processing that can be executed, and limit processing other than these limit processing can be executed, or some of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when games during the advantageous section are played 1500 times in a row). The advantageous section game counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts both when the number of bets is two and three. Further, the advantageous section game number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is completed, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus). to be transferred to In addition, at this time, information regarding advantageous sections (for example, information for controlling the effect section and increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the playing period of pseudo bonuses, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether there is ceiling reduction) information, various information obtained during the advantageous section such as the value of the 1G continuous stock counter, and various information necessary to control the advantageous section) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") that has been paid out since the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting whether the number of bets is two or three. Further, the advantageous section payout number counter performs counting also in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter will count as appropriate according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2 pieces" or "-3 pieces", etc.) when a "miss" or "missed" occurs during the advantageous section, for example. The value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the start of the advantageous section, it may become a negative value (or, if it becomes a negative value, it will always remain ``0''). ). That is, the advantageous section payout number counter is capable of counting the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined maximum point (difference in number of medals: 2400).

When the normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, regardless of whether it is during the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section to be transferred to Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in a row). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the activation of the limit process). It is cleared (initialized) after the counting ends. Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. Further, the control game number counter performs counting when the game is in the non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when the game is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be activated without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", whereas the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (Fig. 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined regulation period has been played in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after the pseudo bonus starts or during it, the player will feel a sense of distrust or loss, which will reduce the interest in the game. There are cases. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (number of games) is performed on a game that is the continuable period (55 games) per increase period before the game on which normal limit processing (number of games) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus being terminated midway.

Note that from this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, the special limit process (number of games) is executed before the game where the normal limit process (number of games) is executed by the continuation period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per 2 increase periods. It is also possible to do so. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the limit processing (number of games) is normally executed before the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase period. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game. Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as going through a precursor state before moving to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit process (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in a game that is a continuable period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) per increase period before the game that is played. In other words, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed; It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). In addition, the control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and When the section ends (including the end due to activation of the limit process), the counting is ended and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when the number of bets is three, and does not perform the counting when the number of bets is two. Further, the control payout number counter performs counting when in a non-bonus state, and does not perform counting when in a 2BB state and a 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs in the advantageous section, the control payout number counter is decremented by an appropriate value according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-3 coins", etc.). However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "missing medal" (or a difference) when a "missing medal" occurs during an advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out). The number of medals paid out is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game where you bet 3 medals and win "Push Order Bell A", if the batting order is appropriate, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) is "8" (the difference number is " On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be ``1'' (the difference in number of medals is ``-2''), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. If a medal is missed, the number of medals paid out becomes "0" (the difference number is "-3"), but the control payout number counter shows the difference number "-3" in any case in the game. +5 pieces” are counted.

In addition, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter becomes It is corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, if it is in the increase period), the pseudo bonus will be released without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. When the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if the pseudo bonus is not in progress (that is, if it is in the performance section), first, the process is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the transfer to the pseudo-bonus is made by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous section is forcibly ended accordingly, and the transition is made to a non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all information regarding the advantageous sections mentioned above is also cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter where normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) is "2401", whereas special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates) Focusing on the fact that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins acquired in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) is "275 coins". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of gaming value that can be awarded in the pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when a predetermined regulated gaming value amount of gaming value is awarded in an advantageous area in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed immediately after or during the start of a pseudo bonus, the player will feel distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. There are cases where this happens. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed is given by the amount of gaming value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By occasionally executing special limit processing (number of payouts), it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful or lost due to the pseudo-bonus ending prematurely.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above-mentioned timing. For example, when a gaming value amount that is less than the gaming value amount for which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed is awarded by the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per two increase periods (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. For example, in order to provide a slight grace period, the amount of gaming value that can be awarded per increase period (275 coins) + grace period is equivalent to the amount of gaming value that can be granted per increase period (275 coins) + the amount of gaming value for which limit processing (number of payouts) is normally executed. A special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount less than the game value amount (8 pieces) is awarded. In other words, the special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed (activated) at any timing before the normal limit process (number of payouts). It is assumed that settings can be made as appropriate depending on the game specifications, etc.

For semi-limit processing (number of games), add "1" to the value of the control game counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it becomes "with ceiling shortening"), add "1" to the value of the 1G continuous counter. ) is multiplied by "55" (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1390" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". ”, the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated).

For semi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout number counter and the value of the 1G continuous counter (if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and it is "with ceiling shortening"), add "1". ) is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given as a pseudo bonus), and is executed when the addition result becomes "1851" or more. For example, if the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and it is "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout number counter is "1301". ”, the semi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (activated). Note that semi-limit processing (number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) both have the same restrictions, so after one operating condition is established and activated, the other operating condition will be applied. Even if this holds true, there is no need for it to operate redundantly.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. It will no longer be done. That is, the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is suppressed. Note that the method for suppressing the extension of the gaming period in the increased section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning the 1G consecutive lottery may be set to be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be set to be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed, it may be made so that it is difficult to win these lots. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that becomes a winning prize in the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which a mode transition advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for pseudo bonuses to be won consecutively.

In addition, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, the "determined hand" (( A special process is performed when a) is won. Hereinafter, this special processing will be explained using as an example a case where the "confirmed combination" is "F_confirmed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "confirmed cherry").

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if a "certain cherry" is won during the performance period (may be during the increase period), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery occurs. ``Winning (next game)'' is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a highly anticipated symbol for the player, so in games where information about stop operations is not reported, the player The general procedure is to perform the stop operation by making one stop and aiming at the "Cherry" symbol (as a guideline, aim at the "BAR" symbol). Therefore, when a game is played according to the general procedure, when a "determined cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower row of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2" ”) may be made. Further, "winning (next game)" is not limited to a pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may also mean a pseudo bonus starting from the next game or later.

Here, a skilled player also aims at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R and stops, in order to further determine whether it is a "weak cherry" or a "certain cherry". Perform operations. As a result, the "BAR" symbols line up in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "confirmed cherry" has been won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, may not or may not be able to perform the stop operation while aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and right reel 3R, and the stop display may appear to be a "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "determined cherry" (for example, see "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, when a "confirmed cherry" is won, the "confirmed cherry reply" is not activated. When a combination of symbols is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" and the "Confirmed Cherry Lip" symbol combination is not displayed, but the "Cherry Lip" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound will also be played. It is now output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, if you win a "certain cherry", at the start of the next game, "red 7" ” will be performed and it will be announced that the pseudo bonus will start, and the pseudo bonus will start.

On the other hand, if a "guaranteed cherry" is won during the production period (or may be during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus will be transferred. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "win (the current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the current game, it is announced that a "red 7" effect will be performed and a pseudo bonus will be started, and the pseudo bonus will be started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation is performed to display the "Middle Rip" symbol combination without displaying the "Confirmed Cherry Rip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Rip" symbol combination). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is given to the effect that the first right stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game was changed from displaying "confirmed cherry reply" to starting a pseudo bonus from the next game. After either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a pseudo bonus starts from the current game → a stop operation is performed according to the special notification, and a game called "middle rep" is displayed. The flow will be changed to Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and from the viewpoint that the player will not be disadvantaged even though it will shift to a pseudo bonus as a result. The control may be performed only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, if you win a "confirmed cherry" after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, and even though a special notification has been made, the "confirmed cherry" When the symbol combination “Cherry Rip” is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure for the stop operation is not notified. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is announced and the "Middle Reply" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a situation occurs, one of the The player will clearly recognize that the semi-limit process has been activated, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any semi-limit process is activated (or it may be after the activation of any quasi-limit process), "F_Replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made when the pseudo bonus transfer lottery is won. In addition, in this case, in the pseudo bonus transfer lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if it is configured such that "Win (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Up to this point, we have explained using the example of monitoring the gaming period in the advantageous section using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" in order to activate the normal limit processing, special limit processing, and semi-limit processing. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, when each limit process is executed, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter. The presence or absence of ceiling shortening (that is, the variable for activating the quasi-limit process), etc. can be changed as appropriate according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the gaming period of the advantageous section is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, if you use the "Navi count" to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, you can use normal limit processing (Navi count), special limit processing (Navi count), or semi-limit processing (Navi count) in the same way as above. (number of times) can also be executed. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the gaming period in the advantageous section, and the value at which limit processing is normally performed for the adopted element. By defining a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which quasi-limit processing is executed, each limit process can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is controlled for a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the number of advantageous section games counter is "1500" or more), or the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the number of advantageous section payout counters is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445") or above), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If the vehicle is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections are terminated when the vehicle transitions to a specific state.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, performance section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous section). When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more) When this happens, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly ended, but if the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more) , or when the amount of gaming value awarded in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount smaller than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), an advantageous state If not, the system shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections ends.

That is, in the first gaming machine, the series of advantageous sections are not forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections are ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow as the advantageous condition ends. It is possible to do so. Moreover, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if the condition is not advantageous, it is changed to an advantageous condition and then terminated. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which an advantageous state can continue (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be awarded (for example, "275 coins"). Therefore, while giving due consideration to the emotions of the players, it is possible to prevent the amount of gaming value given to the players from being extremely restricted.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period. When the special period is shorter and is set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or, when the amount of gaming value awarded in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, when the value of the control payout counter is at the semi-limit) When the processing (number of payouts) reaches a value that is executed, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, the player may be granted more rights than he or she can consume, and in such a situation, a series of advantageous sections will be forcibly terminated, causing the player to feel a sense of distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," it is important to note that, for example, when the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount" are Even if there is a difference between the amount of gaming value that was originally awarded and the amount of gaming value that was actually awarded, the calculation is based on the amount of gaming value that was originally supposed to be awarded, without taking this difference into account. It is about to be done. As a result, the series of advantageous sections may be extended unnecessarily due to the actions of such players, and unfairness may arise between players who have committed such actions and players who have not. Since it is possible to prevent players from putting the game away, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high while also considering the emotions of the players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a player wins a fixed combination (for example, a "fixed cherry") that is guaranteed to transition to an advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after semi-limit processing is activated). When this happens, a special notification is made to prevent the display of special symbol combinations (for example, "confirmed cherry rip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this confirmed combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is given, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to start from the next game starts from the current game. This allows the player to perform the stop operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued. can.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed due to a winning combination, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed in a winning combination, it is not possible to make a special notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the confirmed winning combination was a useless winning. In other words, in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when an advantageous state has started, it is possible to suppress the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, while also making the game more enjoyable. This makes it possible to consider people's feelings as well. Note that any performance execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, the first gaming machine determines whether or not to make a special notification depending on whether or not a confirmed winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I'm trying to decide. Thereby, the situation in which special notification is performed can be managed more appropriately.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of betted game value, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state, This allows normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) to be executed.

Further, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-card bet state, but do not perform counting in the 2-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed. Processing (number of payouts) is not allowed to be executed. Therefore, in a two-card bet state, the series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during a pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts).

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, the winning probability of the small winning combination and the number of medals paid out are different between the 3-piece bet state and the 2-piece bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15), and the 3-piece bet state is different. The player is at a disadvantage when playing a game with two bets than when playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is disadvantaged when playing a game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, if a game is played with two bets during a pseudo bonus, the procedure for stopping the game may not be notified, thereby putting the player at a disadvantage.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount of gaming value (for example, "3 coins") being bet, a series of advantageous sections are forced in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling a sense of distrust or loss while also preventing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, making it possible to consider the feelings of players. It is said that On the other hand, if a second amount of gaming value (for example, "2 coins") is bet and a game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. This makes it possible for the player to realize that he or she did not play the game using the intended gaming method, thereby encouraging the player to play the game using the intended gaming method.

Furthermore, in a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the second amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played than when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played. Therefore, by making it possible to call attention to this, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous situation, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a way that is not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to this.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover combination storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of a pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, the configurations of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the storage areas described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by 1 byte of data. Although the data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "Data" column in FIG. 17, for convenience of explanation, the symbol combinations associated with the bits in each storage area are shown in FIG. The "combinations" shown (in FIG. 17, the symbols on reel 3L, the symbols on reel 3C, and the symbols on reel 3R are described in this order) and their contents (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination that corresponds to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in the current game). It is used to For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if carried over), "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed combination (that is, the type of symbol combination displayed on the active line in the current game). used for For example, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB is displayed on the active line in the current game, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is rotating. used for For example, in this game, when at least one of the reels is rotating, if the combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, "1" is set in bit 0 of storage area 1. is stored.

(Carryover win storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover winning combination storage area will be explained. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored in the carryover combination storage area as a carryover combination ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed on the active line. In addition, while the carryover winnings are stored in the carryover winnings storage area, the carryover winnings (bonus winnings) are stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winnings determined by the internal lottery process (minor winnings/replay winnings). be done.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the gaming state flag storage area will be explained. The gaming state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, when the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that in the first gaming machine, since the RT state is not provided, the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 is not provided with an area indicating the type of RT state. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) during the advantageous section is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later. You can also. Further, the same applies to the game sections of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section. It is possible to provide an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game status flag in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and the ART state. It is possible to provide an AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) for management, or it is also possible to store and manage the game state flag in this gaming state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Further, for example, if the current mode is Heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 21. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Furthermore, bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of stopped reel), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of reel being rotated).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the currently pressed stop button, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, it is a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the press order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 22. The press order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Note that the pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, that is, the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), "1" remains stored in bits 0 and 1, but "0" is stored in bits 2 to 5. will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), "1" remains stored in bit 0, but "1" remains stored in bit 1. "0" is now stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order for the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be explained with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. In addition, in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing content may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing content of the various processes shown below is limited to this. It's not a thing.

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (S1). In this process, various processes necessary when the power is turned on are performed. Note that details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a winning activation flag storage area where data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal reception/start check process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random value acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, in the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for performance (other random numbers for lottery) used in various kinds of lottery related to gameplay (for example, in the range of 0 to 65,535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and the various extracted random numbers are stored in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the above. The required number of random values can be obtained as appropriate from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range 0 to 65535, the range 0 to 32767, the range 0 to 255, or the range 0 to 127, etc.). .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining an internal winning combination are performed based on an internal lottery table and random numbers for internal lottery depending on the current gaming state and the like. Note that details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this process, for various game states, when a game starts, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the start of the game will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, data of a start command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in a communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Furthermore, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main-side performance control processing at the start of the game (S8). In this process, when starting a game and performing various effects under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side), various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, for example, when the instruction monitor is in the AT state and informs information of a stop operation, the manner of the notification is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S9). In this process, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table, is set based on the internal winning combination, the game state, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This process requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled by the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32) described later, and the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Rotation begins. Each reel that has started rotating is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a reel rotation start command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S11). In this process, the pull-in priority is determined for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reels (all reels in this case) by referring to the set internal winning combination and the set pull-in priority table. The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, a symbol code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R. Perform various processing necessary for this purpose. Note that details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation determination process (S13). In this process, it is determined whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Further, although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning activation command generation and storage process is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/replay operation processing (S14). In this process, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a combination of symbols related to a small role, the corresponding number of medals will be paid out, and if it is a combination of symbols related to a replay role, the number of medals will be paid out for the next time. Performs various processes necessary to activate replay in a game. For example, if the symbol combination determined in the winning operation determination process described above is a symbol combination related to a replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter described below. Perform the processing to do. Further, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this process, for each game state, when a game ends, if a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols, etc.), the game state is transitioned according to the established transition condition. , or perform various processes necessary to manage the gaming period of the current gaming state. The details of the state control process at the end of the game will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs main side performance control processing at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the end of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of the pseudo game (or notification regarding the pseudo game) is controlled. Further, although the details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-described processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the configuration may be such that processes other than these processes are performed as necessary, or the configuration may be configured such that some of these processes are not performed. That is, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on process performed in S1 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of power-on processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) upon power-on, then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the write to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally as a result of the test. S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (S21: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the settings can be changed.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when changing settings (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a carryover combination storage area, a gaming state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or other storage area where data needs to be erased when changing settings.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-mentioned setting value determination operation and setting value confirmation operation, new setting values are set (stored) in a setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, after a new setting value is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the state in which settings can be changed has ended.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until the setting key-type switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is in the off state (S26: YES), initialization command generation and storage processing is performed (S27). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 has been completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-type switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is cut off (at the time of power outage) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (S28: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a game return process (S29). In this process, the pachi-slot machine 1 is returned to the state before the power cutoff. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). It should be noted that the error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the above-mentioned reset operation, but is resolved in response to a new set value being set. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1, and thereafter operates normally until a new set value is set (until the above-mentioned processes S22 to S26 are performed). The process does not proceed (S2 and subsequent steps in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the medal reception/start check process performed in S3 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the medal reception/start check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay winning combination was won in the previous unit game (replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Further, although details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the process in S42, it performs a medal auxiliary storage switch check process (S43). In this process, it is determined whether the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on (that is, whether a certain number or more of medals are stored in the medal auxiliary storage 33), and the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is turned on. If it is determined that it is in the on state, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, processing is put on hold until the error is resolved. Further, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the on state, this process is ended.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits are checked, and it is also determined whether acceptance of medals is prohibited or a selector error has occurred, and if it is possible to accept medals, the number of medals is Set the state to a state in which reception is possible (state in which bet operations can be received) (to permit reception of medals). Note that if a selector error has occurred, the process is on standby until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to accept medals (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (S45: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Further, although details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal input signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medal insertion or credit is possible (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or credit (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (S49 is NO) , prohibits acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 is in a state where it is not possible to accept medals (a state where it is not possible to accept bet operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that it is not possible to accept medals (NO in S45), in S47 it determines that it is possible to insert medals or credit (YES in S47), After the process of S48, it is determined whether the number of inserted coins is the number of coins that can start playing (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of coins inserted is the number of coins that can be used to start the game (S49: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (S50: YES), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal reception/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of coins inserted is not the number that can start the game (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the on state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 performs processing. is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking the set value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set value, the number of bets, the gaming state, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains an internal lottery random number value from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the internal lottery random number value acquired in S4 of the above-described main process. In addition, in this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-mentioned power-on error process (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the obtained internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (for example, by addition update) using the lottery value of each internal lottery combination specified in the internal lottery table that has been set, and the updated result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflowed). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not obtained even after determining all the internal winning combinations, the result of the current unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" will be determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (S65 is NO), the process returns to S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and sequentially updates the random numbers for internal lottery) until all internal winning combinations are determined (or if the internal winning combinations are determined midway through the process). (until it is determined) the process of S64 is repeated.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has been determined (S65 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (that is, it is not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but is a small combination or a replay combination). It is determined whether or not it is a winning combination (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover winning combination (S66: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (NO in S66), and after the processing in S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a carryover winning combination ( In other words, it is determined whether the winning combination is a carryover bonus winning combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carryover target combination (S68: YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have not been carried over yet. If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69 is YES), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, data in the carryover winning combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the processing of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the carryover combination storage area in the data corresponding to the symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover winning combination (S68 is NO), then in S69 it determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S69 is NO). ), and after the processing in S70, it is determined again whether the data in the carryover winning combination storage area is "0" (S71).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (S71: NO), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. That is, when the bonus combination has been carried over (or won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed in correspondence with the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. ``1'' is stored in the bit.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71 is YES), and after the process in S72, it performs a sub-flag etc. setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous section sub-flag and an advantageous section winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. Note that in this process, for example, when in the AT state, information corresponding to information on a stop operation notified by the instruction monitor may be set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when shifting to a flag as a predetermined RT state based on winning a predetermined bonus combination, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined bonus combination has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, since the space between the flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a gaming state stored in the gaming state flag storage area), there is no need to check here. Further, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific number of games are played after the establishment of a specific transition condition, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S82 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S84). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition conditions for transitioning to any gaming state are not satisfied (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S85: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the start condition for an advantageous section is established (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (starting conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not this lottery result is the one that starts the advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S87: YES), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process at the start of the advantageous section (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of an advantageous section, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the gaming period of a series of advantageous sections), etc. Perform the setting process as appropriate.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, in accordance with the set destination mode, when transitioning to a pseudo bonus, "55 games" is set as the gaming period, and the game transitions to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of transitioning to other modes, the corresponding number of ceiling games is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) for various types of lottery (see FIGS. 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current gaming section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S85: NO), it performs processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous section end condition is met (S92). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (conditions for ending the advantageous section) are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S93: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition for the advantageous section is not satisfied (S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the advantageous section game start process performed in S91 of the game start state control process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of games during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing the gaming period such as various modes (playing states) during the advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtraction (addition) by 1 for each game, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the playing period in the AT state (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the start of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning sub-flag, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. Processing is performed for this purpose.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the start command, etc. are set. Note that in this process, it may be possible to determine whether or not to generate navigation. In other words, when the notification target winning combination is won in the AT state, navigation may not necessarily occur. The determination may be made according to the probability of occurrence).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether a mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S90 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section.

The state control process at the start of the game shown in FIG. 27, the state control process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. 28, and the process at the end of the game during the advantageous period shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends (for example, a process that refers to the determined internal winning combination, such as changing the game state or mode, etc.) Processing where the processing result only needs to be reflected until the end of the current game (or until the start of the next game) means that it only needs to be performed in either one, and the same applies to both. This does not mean that the processing is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game starts or when the game ends.

On the other hand, processing that needs to be performed when starting a game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting process, etc.) shall be performed when starting the game, and when the game ends. Processing that needs to be performed (for example, processing that refers to the combination of displayed symbols) may be performed when the game ends. Also, for example, there are cases where processing needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game and before the end of the game, or cases where it is better to perform the process (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) may be carried out at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (S111: YES), each reel is allowed to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Additionally, the operation stop button storage area is updated accordingly (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, "1" is stored in bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In addition, when performing automatic stop control, the standby time can be measured and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the bits in the operation stop button storage area are "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Further, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle region of the reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs sliding piece number determination processing (S117). In this process, for example, the most appropriate number of sliding pieces (symbol movement amount) is determined by referring to the number of sliding pieces specified in the above-mentioned stop table, the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the scheduled stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will finally stop based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding pieces determined in the process of S117 described above is stored as the planned stop position. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, data for a reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the scheduled stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether there are any reels that are still rotating (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

If the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), it performs control change processing (S122). In this process, depending on the player's stop operation mode up to this point, for example, if it is necessary to change the stop table, attraction priority table, etc. set in the above-mentioned reel stop initial setting process, such changes may be made. Reset various information necessary for stop control.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an attraction priority order storage process (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reels is set as the set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the scheduled stop position on the reel whose scheduled stop position has already been determined. The data indicating the attraction priority is obtained by referring to the attraction priority order table, and is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(Status control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the above-mentioned main process will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S131). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from any gaming state to any gaming state are satisfied. For example, when transitioning to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, a check is performed in this process to see if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not the termination conditions for these gaming states are satisfied. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is checked whether a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end conditions of these gaming states are satisfied by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is satisfied (S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the gaming state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the gaming state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming status flag storage area, and Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the termination conditions of these gaming states are satisfied, bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting process according to the set gaming state (S134). In this process, depending on the transition of the gaming state, for example, it is necessary to set the gaming period of the gaming state, or to set the lottery value (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process. In such cases, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and even if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". For example, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the end condition.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to any gaming state is not satisfied (S132 is NO), and after the processing in S134, the current gaming section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether there is one (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (S135: YES), it performs a process of checking whether the conditions for starting the advantageous section are established (S136). As described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S86 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start condition for the advantageous section is satisfied (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the starting conditions for the advantageous section are not satisfied (S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs a setting process for starting the advantageous section (S138). Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S88 (game start state control process) described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) during the started advantageous section. Note that, as described above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S89 described above (game start state control process).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous section, only the process that refers to the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this process is similar to the process of S90 (game start state control process) described above.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (S135: NO), it performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a process of checking whether conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether transition conditions for transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (end conditions for an advantageous section) are satisfied. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the operating conditions of various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts during the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode. In this step, it is checked whether 32 games have elapsed or not.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous section are satisfied (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met (S143: YES), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets a non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous period, for example, various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (playing state) during the advantageous period, and the playing period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) are displayed. Initialization processing is performed to clear all information related to (including information on advantageous sections) etc. (that is, information related to advantageous sections). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous section are not satisfied (S143: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section performed in S141 of the above-mentioned state control processing at the end of the game will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during an advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters for managing gaming periods such as various modes (gaming states) during an advantageous period, or other counters are used. Various counters that manage the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in a specific mode (AT state) (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (S152: YES), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when it is possible to extend the AT state playing period (for example, by extending the number of games or adding the number of sets) at the end of the game, it is determined whether the execution conditions for such an extension are satisfied or not. Based on the result of this determination, processing such as extending the gaming period is performed (if it is possible to shorten the playing period in the AT state, processing related to the shortening is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state gaming period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended or not, or the AT state gaming period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and this process only deals with the extension. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is performed based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag, and a process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the result of this lottery.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (S152 is NO), and after S153, the main CPU 101 determines whether mode transition conditions are satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether the destination mode has been determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (gaming state) in the advantageous section to which the mode has been transferred. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the destination mode is set, which is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery values (lottery table) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process are set. If necessary, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a process similar to the process of S140 described above is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the process at the end of the game during the advantageous section. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (S154 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of periodic interrupt processing.

Here, in this embodiment, the period of periodic interrupt processing (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the cycle of periodic interrupt processing is not limited to this. For example, periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the interrupt processing may actually be executed for some or all of the processing. By setting the number of interrupts to "2" or more, the periodic interrupt process may be executed at a different cycle as a result.

First, the main CPU 101 performs register saving processing (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt and the input state at the time of the current interrupt are compared to check whether there has been a change in the input state, and if there is a change in the input state, the input state of the main RAM 103 is The change is stored in port storage area 0 (not shown), and input states that are not related to the change are stored as they are in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this process, the driving of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled, and the rotation and stop of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 is sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input status command.

Note that in this embodiment, various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 in periodic interrupt processing. It may be configured such that the information is not stored but is directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. Further, in this embodiment, although detailed explanation is omitted, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. For example, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by parallel communication. It may also be configured such that the information is sent to

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door opening/closing check process (S208). In this process, for example, the open/close state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input state of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state), a security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the outline of the sub-side control process.

In addition, in the Pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification. There are not many restrictions on the 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of effect devices to be connected, the type of effect performed by the effect devices, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. That is why it is labeled as "Summary" in FIG. 33.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This process detects whether an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary to perform various production execution control processes described below. Processing such as starting up is performed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it performs a production execution control process upon command reception (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if settings have been changed, initialization processing is executed on the sub side as appropriate, and the settings must be changed. If so, processing is also executed on the sub side to restore the state to the state before the power cut.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if it is in a non-AT state, the content of the production that suggests or informs internal winning combinations, gaming status, etc. (as necessary) (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if it is in the AT state, in addition to this, it determines the content of the performance to notify the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, it refers to the parameter information of the received lock command, determines the content of the performance that is linked to the content of the lock performance, and creates various performances so that the determined content is executed. Control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to and linked with the stop start position and planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) The content of the performance is determined and various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the determined content is executed. For example, when a winning activation command is received, the information on the parameters of the received winning activation command is referred to, and when a bonus is awarded, the content of the performance that is linked to the bonus to be awarded is determined, and the determined content is The various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation is performed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), and for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the sub-CPU 201 executes production when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when a performance button corresponding to the performance is operated during execution of the operation-linked performance, various performance devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked performance changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, while not playing a game, control is performed to display the user menu. Further, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is displayed, control is performed in accordance with these operations.

Further, when a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger is established, the sub CPU 201 performs other production execution control processing (S307). In this process, for example, if the non-operation period in which no operation related to the game or user menu is performed is a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration status notification is determined and determined. The various performance devices are controlled so that the performance of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As mentioned above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is equipped with various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling performances, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. Note that an example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the game parlor side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and the appropriate selection/decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the player can obtain various information. , it is possible to make various settings.

For example, if "Arrangement/Payout Table" is selected/determined, it is possible to confirm the symbol arrangement in the Pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the game information showing the payout (contents of benefits) when winning the prize. The following information screen is displayed on the performance display section.

For example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed on the performance display section. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

For example, when "Custom" is selected/determined, the production mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the production, the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character, etc.) or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of production occurrence (including the type of expectation when the production occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (production execution timing) etc.) A setting screen is displayed on the effect display section where the settings can be made. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected/determined, it is possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.). In such information providing services, for example, a player logs in to start a game (it is also possible to start a game without logging in), and when the game ends, logs out, thereby providing gaming history information (e.g. , the total number of games played, how many times an advantageous game state occurred, the maximum number of coins acquired, and other information corresponding to the results of various games) can be confirmed or obtained.

For example, the game history information may include information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output, depending on the game result (the fulfillment of the opening condition), It also includes information about accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of songs that can be output.

Note that various methods can be used for logging in and logging out in such an information providing service. For example, using the player's terminal, the player may be able to log in and log out by having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display section, or the player may enter a password. (Specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, instead of a two-dimensional code, a string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for next input, and The password can be obtained by the player writing it down on paper or taking a photo with a mobile device, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered when logging in before the next game starts). - You may be able to log out. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform login and logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Game store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (this may be a setting change operation or other operation by the game hall administrator) by the game parlor administrator, and the desired menu is selected from the hall menu. Further, when the selected menu is appropriately selected/determined, the game parlor manager can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen on which the date and time of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be set is displayed on the production display section. Note that the date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the above-described sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

For example, when "total medal information" is selected and determined, history information indicating the number of coins inserted and number of coins paid out within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu.

For example, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days), etc. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section where history information indicating the information can be confirmed. For example, if "error information history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time of error occurrence and its contents within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days) in the pachislot machine 1 is also provided. An information screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows confirmation of the information.

For example, if "monitoring history" is selected/determined, history information indicating the date and time the door was opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day of 7 business days), the period, etc. of the pachislot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed on the performance display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows setting of the mode, frequency, etc. of various warning notifications in the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, for example, when "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in a user menu. In addition, at the time of such settings, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to the settings, the various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations may be It can be used as part of an operation section that accepts operations related to (that is, an operation section that accepts production operations).

Further, for example, when "stop-stop setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the stop-stop function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the discontinuation function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, disables the game until a cancellation operation (for example, a reset operation) is performed by the manager of the game parlor. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the cancellation function is set to the ON state, an automatic payment function, which will be described later, may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic payment setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the performance display section that allows settings such as whether or not to activate the automatic payment function in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function in which credits are automatically settled (that is, all credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is met. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be established, for example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the above-mentioned limit process, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increased section, or an advantageous section). It may be made to be established when any of the sections (including the performance section) ends. Moreover, when the automatic payment function is set to the ON state, the above-mentioned cancellation function may also be set to the ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the cancellation function or automatic payment function, in order to enable more detailed settings or to more easily accept operations related to settings, various operation sections that accept the player's gaming operations are provided. can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (that is, the operation unit that accepts production operations). However, in this case, it is also undesirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It may be possible to do so.

[9. Expansion example]
Up to this point, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine that is capable of playing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a player's gaming action (operation). Further, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various changes and expansions are possible. An example of such expansion will be described below, although it is just an example.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player's bet operation (that is, the operation of inserting the medals in hand into the medal slot 5 and placing a bet, or placing the credited medals on the MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) The game is started with one of the starting conditions being that there is an operation (operating 6b to place a bet), and if there is a payout of medals when the game ends, the hopper device 32 is driven and the medal payout port 11 is activated. Although the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, this embodiment applies to all formats in which a player bets the gaming value necessary for a game, plays a game based on the bet, and is awarded a benefit (for example, a gaming value is awarded) based on the result of the game. It is possible to apply the invention according to the above. In other words, in addition to physically inserting (spending) and paying out medals through the player's actions, the game value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the Pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, it is also possible to manage the game value in a manner that does not allow the player to directly contact the game value, and to enable games without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless gaming machine." Note that medalless gaming machines are sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines", "enclosed gaming machines", etc.

Note that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) that is attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may also be a (connected) gaming value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal number control board"). An example in which this gaming value management device is provided will be explained below.

The gaming value management device is a device that includes at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the pachislot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device will be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") via an external gaming value providing device (such as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication. The gaming value management device performs the gaming value lending operation (i.e., provides the gaming value necessary for the player to perform the gaming value betting operation) by performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device. (i.e., the action of providing the player with the gaming value related to the award when the winning role is won (the winning combination is established), etc.); The player shall be able to perform actions such as electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by the action. Note that the gaming value providing device is sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming media) handling device," "gaming value (gaming media) lending device," or "sand."

In addition, the external gaming value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server), and the gaming value management device communicates with the external ball output management device through communication devices and external gaming value management devices. It is configured to be able to transmit ball release management information via the providing device. Here, the put-out ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for an external ball-out management device to manage the put-out balls. Note that an example of the ball release management information will be described later. Furthermore, the external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, via an Internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, for example, the term "balls paid out" refers to the difference number (net increase) obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number paid out. The extent to which benefits are given to players (for example, how much the player has gained (how much has the game store lost), or how much has the player lost (how much has the game store gained)? The concept also includes the degree of continuation of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling expected by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed gaming value number display device (not shown) is provided on the front side of the Pachislot machine 1 to display the number of held gaming values, and the gaming value management device is configured to control the number of game values based on the management result of the number of gaming values held. The number of game values displayed on the held game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may be configured to not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming using an electromagnetic method, but also to be able to control the display of the recorded results. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device, and also allows the player to It has the ability to not reduce the number of recorded game values except when directly operated, and the signal indicating the number of recorded game values can only be transmitted through a communication device. is desirable.

Note that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of a player using an external gaming value providing device, but also controls the number of gaming values bet based on the player's physical movements and the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical movements. The player may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method or by a method such as the medalless game machine described above, so no matter which specification the pachi-slot machine 1 has. Even if there is, it can be made to have a common configuration. Further, in this case, it is possible to adopt a method in which the gaming value management device directly controls the above-mentioned selector 31 and hopper device 32, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirect control by transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for operating the medalless gaming machine, such as a rental operating means and a return (payment) operating means, which can be operated by a player. In addition, the gaming value providing device includes various devices such as an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (for example, an IC card), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operating means necessary for the operation of the medalless gaming machine, such as a loan operating means and a return operating means, which can be operated by a player may be provided (none of which are shown). Note that the insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the gaming parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the gaming parlor. The gaming value recorded on the non-member recording medium is valid only on that day (invalid after the next day), but the gaming value recorded on the member recording medium is valid even after the next day.

An example of the flow of the game in this case will be explained. For example, first, the player deposits value into the gaming value providing device using any method. The gaming value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of negotiable values in response to a player's operation on any of the lending operation means, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with a gaming value corresponding to the subtracted negotiable value. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operations if more gaming value is required. Thereafter, when the player ends the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values based on the result of the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The gaming value management device transmits the number of gaming values to the gaming value providing device in response to the player's operation on any of the return operation means. The game value providing device discharges the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. The gaming value management device clears the number of gaming values stored in itself when transmitting the number of gaming values. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like in order to exchange it for a prize, or the player can take the ejected recording medium to a gaming value providing device compatible with other Pachislot machines 1. By inserting it, you can move the machine and continue playing. Further, if the ejected recording medium is a member recording medium, it is valid even after the next day, so the game can be stopped at this point.

Note that in the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. It may be configured such that only the number of game values desired by the player can be transmitted. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. In addition, the gaming value providing device records the transmitted gaming value number on a recording medium and outputs it, but it uses the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna etc. to send the same value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalent may be sent as long as it provides the player with something of equal value.

In addition, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device is provided with a lock operating means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled depending on the operation of the lock operating means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the Pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication. The lock state may be released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, for example, some external structures such as the medal slot 5 and the medal payout slot 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is not necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible to reduce not only the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine but also the power consumption of the game machine. Furthermore, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent acts against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment can be improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of medalless gaming machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example in which the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. Note that, below, a configuration example in which a medal number control board (gaming value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (number of gaming values) held by the player. Further, the medal number control board is connected to a communication dedicated unit (gaming value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Further, a medal number control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal number control board. Further, the medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball output management device is, for example, a server for ball output management managed by an association (an information center) to which gaming machine manufacturers are members, and the transmitted ball output management information is stored in the ball output management device. This is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling performance of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from this point of view, since the medal number control board and the connection terminal board play important functions in the pachislot machine 1 like the main control board 71, they should be designed in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. It needs to be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show examples of such aspects.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case like the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing treatments to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize traces of it being opened (or the number of times it has been opened). (For example, sealing by caulking, pasting of a seal seal, or pasting of a caulking sticker that records the cutting of the caulk, etc.)

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modification can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are housed in a medal number control board case provided separately from the main control board case. It shows that there is. The medal number control board case shall be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, and the medal number control board and connection terminals housed inside the case. The board shall be stored so that it is easily visible.

Here, the medal number control board case of configuration example 2 may be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or may be configured to undergo at least a part of the sealing process. You can also do that. For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same way as the main control board case, but a sealing sticker may not be attached. Further, for example, in the main control board case, it is mandatory to use a predetermined caulking seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the caulking seal.

<Example of stored data>
The example of accumulated data shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the ball output management device. That is, the medal number control board shows an example of the ball output management information transmitted to the ball output management device via the connection terminal board and the communication dedicated unit. Note that this is just an example, and a configuration may be adopted in which some of the various information shown in FIG. 34 is not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. You can also do it.

Moreover, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit is also arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device is also arbitrary. The information may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball output management device can monitor the ball output performance of each gaming machine on at least one unit (for example, one business day at a game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit transmits information to the ball output management device. Further, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of coins inserted" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values bet by the player's bet operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game), excluding the number bet by the replay operation. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "total number of coins to be paid out" is the cumulative number of coins to be paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded through payout processing of a gaming machine, excluding those awarded through replay operations, to a communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, every unit game). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference in the number of coins that occurred during one unit after the power was turned on for each gaming machine (in short, the number of difference in the number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum difference in the number of medals, and transmits the calculated information to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours at the game parlor), and the communication-only unit transmits the information. is transmitted to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the gaming parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of coins paid out for accessories" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out during the operation of various accessory products. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during the operation of various accessories at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of various accessories). The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

The accumulated data "Total number of consecutive paid out coins" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. This is the cumulative number of coins paid out during operation. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during the operation of a continuous accessory) of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of a gaming machine during the operation of a continuous accessory. The communication dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business at the game parlor).

Further, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the winning ratio monitoring device 54 to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation in the winning ratio monitoring device 54), and the communication-only unit The information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal number control board). In addition, the accumulated data "accessory object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information, the accumulated data "continuous accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, and the accumulated data "advantageous object ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned continuous accessory ratio information, for example. For example, the "section ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "instruction accessory ratio" corresponds to the above-mentioned accessory ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. The accumulated data "status ratio of accessories, etc." corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even when various accessories are in operation.

The accumulated data "number of games" is the cumulative number of games played per unit after each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played to a communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game). For example, the information is transmitted to the ball payout management device at the end of business hours at the game parlor.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is an individual identification number (also referred to as "CPUID", also referred to as "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number.

The accumulated data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code.

The accumulated data "medal number control chip ID number" is an individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends information including the individual identification number. Send information including this individual identification number. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the manufacturer code. Send information including manufacturer code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball output management device, it sends this information including the product code. Submit information including product code. Note that if the main control board 71 is configured to send various information to the communication-only unit without providing a medal number control board, the information will be "0".

In this way, the ball output management device is capable of accumulating various types of information (ball output management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of individual identification information (for example, the above-mentioned "main control chip ID number" to "medal number control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball output management device can identify the gaming machine that is the sender based on these pieces of individual identification information, and also, for example, from a certain point on, the "main control chip ID number" and "medal number control chip ID number" If the correspondence relationships between the two control boards become different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out).

Further, the ball output management information includes a plurality of pieces of ball output information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of inserted coins" to "number of games played") that can identify the ball output performance per unit. Therefore, the ball output management device can recognize whether the gambling quality of the sending gaming machine is within an appropriate range based on the ball output information. For example, if the ``total number of coins paid out'' or ``instruction included accessory ratio'' becomes extremely high after a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity or unauthorized modification has been carried out, or there is some flaw in the original specification design. It is possible to recognize the possibility that something has happened.

If the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the ball payout management device, the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine manufacturer, and it can be expected that appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, a plurality of managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication dedicated unit) that transmits the ball output management information transmitted from the managed gaming machines to the ball output management device, and each By constructing a management system that includes a ball output management device that manages the ball output performance of the managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines under management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of gaming values held by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal number control board may be provided with a medal number monitoring device (not shown) so that the manager of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitoring device is composed of, for example, a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitoring device collects and calculates various types of information (for example, part or all of the above-mentioned ball output management information) regarding the number of gaming values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. Incidentally, if all the display contents of the winning ratio monitoring device 54 are displayed by the medal number monitoring device, the winning ratio monitoring device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

Further, the medal number monitoring device may be mounted on the medal number control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal number control board. Good too. Further, as long as it is within the cabinet G, it may be provided at another location. For example, it may be provided on the medal number control board case. Furthermore, a management switch for starting the display on the medal number monitoring device or for switching its contents may be provided in the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, on the premise that such a management switch is used, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitoring device, for example.

Note that the medal number monitoring device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error with the connection terminal board, a communication error with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal number control RWM. In certain cases, a corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, in order for the game parlor manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed on or near the medal number control board case. What is necessary is to provide an explanatory section (such as pasting a sticker or printing) to show the information.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. In this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as follows, for example.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. This not only makes it possible to reduce the number of parts, but also reduces wiring directed to the outside, thereby increasing the security effect.

Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as one unit. Further, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least in the cabinet G. Thereby, work efficiency during connection can be improved. Further, since the length of the wiring can be made constant and the wiring locations can be limited, the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the ball payout management information is transmitted to the ball payout management device. Further, the ball output management device can appropriately manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball output management information. Therefore, on the premise that the ball dispensing performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball output performance, and on the premise that the ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have a function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain restriction condition.

For example, the medal number control board is configured to include a payout monitoring RWM (which may be the above-mentioned medal number control RWM or another RWM). The ball payout monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but monitors the ball payout in such a way that it is not initialized when the advantageous section ends. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantageous section itself will not be forcibly terminated, but the probability of navigation occurrence will be reduced, the probability that the AT state will be extended, etc. Alternatively, the AT state itself may be terminated to reduce the ball dispensing performance. Even in this case, it becomes possible to appropriately manage the ball dispensing performance. In addition, in this case, such a control result may be transmitted to the ball release management device as ball release management information. That is, a configuration may be adopted in which both the medal number control board and the ball output management device can manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of configuration of main control board of pachislot machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 35, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, below, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, in the Pachislot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board management number must be printed on the main control board 71. It has become. The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the management number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board management number are printed in letters on the main control board 71 as in the conventional case. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that a pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted is manufactured by BB Corporation. At this time, initially, only the manufacturer name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" at the bottom are printed. Thereafter, if Model A is removed from the game parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different Pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "Model B"), then AA Co., Ltd. AA laser-engraved the manufacturer's name and board management number printed on the lower row, and in a different space wrote the manufacturer's manufacturing number and board management number related to the company (for example, the manufacturer's name and board management number on the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35). The name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board control number "AA-00-11-22" must be newly printed.

Then, after that, model B is removed from the game parlor, and if, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter described as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. would have to use laser engraving to delete the manufacturer's name and board management number that had been printed on the top row, and then print a new manufacturing number and board management number related to the company in a different space. However, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, there is no more free space, so even though reuse is still possible in terms of hardware, it is difficult to reuse the main control board 71 due to the above-mentioned restrictions. The problem was that sometimes it was not possible.

Note that this also applies even if multiple manufacturer names and board management numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board management number for both AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed in advance, the serial number and board management number for AA Corporation are laser engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although BB Co., Ltd. may be able to reuse the product, AA Co., Ltd. may not be able to reuse it. On the other hand, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 can be expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. That is, it is possible to improve the reusability of a board used for controlling a game, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 shows printing of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number, but JAN code (bar code) and other The following code can be used. In other words, the code can be any type of code as long as it contains information that allows the confirming person to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). Good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. Afterwards, when Model A is removed from the game parlor and AA Corporation attempts to manufacture Model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

Afterwards, when Model B is removed from the game parlor and BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture Model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. The code is removed by laser engraving, and the fourth code from the right is printed, so that the fourth code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. For example, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

That is, in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. ) Since space can be saved, it is possible to improve reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, like configuration example 2 described above, shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and board management number is printed. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, assume that two copies of AA Corporation and BB Corporation are printed. In addition, the code can be read by caulking the parts corresponding to each code on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case) with, for example, a belt-shaped member. It is possible to be fixed in an impossible state. Furthermore, for example, by cutting the band-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, when it is assumed that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is considered unreadable. The first code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, model A was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to AA Corporation.

After that, Model B was removed from the game parlor, and for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture Model C, only the third code from the right was readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right includes information that can identify the serial number and board management number related to BB Corporation. After that, even if model C was removed from the game parlor and AA Co., Ltd. tried to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. By making only the code readable and making the first to third codes from the right unreadable, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, so further reuse is possible and more It is also possible to reuse it at other gaming machine manufacturers. In addition, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, it is also possible to provide only the caulking holes and print a code at the location corresponding to the caulking hole each time the product is reused.

[10. Second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 60, another specific example of the specifications regarding the gaming performance of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "second gaming machine". It should be noted that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the second gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to the other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and Some or all of the various specifications and functions described as another gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to the second gaming machine in this embodiment. That is, the invention according to this embodiment can be a combination of these as appropriate.

Furthermore, although the second gaming machine differs from the first gaming machine in terms of specifications regarding its gameplay, the basic control regarding the progress of the game and the basic control regarding the execution of effects is different from that of the first gaming machine. It is similar to the machine. That is, in the second gaming machine as well, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 executes various processes, examples of which are shown in FIGS. 23 to 32, to rotate and stop each reel, give gaming value, It performs various controls such as changing the game state, updating information on various counters and various flags necessary for various controls, executing effects on the main side, and reporting information. Further, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 performs various controls related to performance execution and information notification on the sub side by executing various processes, an example of which is shown in FIG. Note that the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 may appropriately perform the control processing necessary to realize the gameplay described below, and the method thereof can be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the invention. , in the second gaming machine, individual detailed explanations regarding such various processes are omitted.

In the second gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, which is a predetermined irregular line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the upper area of the reel 3R. In addition, in the second gaming machine, as a gaming state related to the lottery probability of the internal winning combination (see FIGS. 48 and 49 described later), a non-bonus state "F_2BB" to be described later is carried over between 2BB flags. and between the 3BB flags where "F_3BB" described later is carried over, between non-flags where no bonus combination has been won (not carried over), and between the RB gaming state (BB gaming state) which is a bonus state. It consists of:

In addition, since the BB gaming state is always controlled to the RB gaming state, for example, "RB" shown in FIG. 49, which will be described later, indicates the RB gaming state as well as the BB gaming state. Further, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that transitions in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 2BB, and a 3BB state that transitions to in response to the display of a combination of symbols related to 3BB. Ru. The 2BB state is configured to end when more than 1 medal is paid out during the state, and the 3BB state is ended when more than 53 medals are paid out during the state. . In addition, if the settings are changed between 2BB flags, the information indicating that 2BB is carried over (information on the carryover combination storage area related to 2BB) is not cleared, so even after the settings are changed, the information indicating that 2BB is carried over is not cleared. continue. On the other hand, when a setting change is made between 3BB flags, the information that 3BB is carried over (information on the carryover combination storage area related to 3BB) is cleared, so after the setting change, it becomes a non-flag interval.

Furthermore, with the second gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2-bet state) and with three medals bet (3-bet state). There is. In more detail, in the non-bonus state, it is possible to play in both the 2-card bet state and the 3-card bet state, and in the bonus state, it is possible to play the game only in the 3-card bet state. It is composed of Further, in the second gaming machine, like the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play the game with a bet of 3 bets between 2BB flags. That is, the 3 bet state between the 2BB flags becomes the "recommended gaming state". Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the following description will be made on the assumption that the game will be played in the recommended game state.

[10-1. Game performance of second gaming machine]
Next, the flow of the game in the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46. 36 to 39 are diagrams showing an example of the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the second gaming machine, and FIG. 40 explains an example of the detailed gaming flow in the CZ2 state. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a detailed game flow from the AT state to the judge state, and FIGS. 42 to 46 are diagrams for explaining examples of various tables in the second gaming machine. FIG.

In the second gaming machine, as in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays the game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous period and an advantageous period, and as shown in FIGS. A standby state is provided as a game state related to playability, and a normal state, a precursor state, a CZ state, an RB state, a BB state, an AT state, a judge state, and an ending state are provided as game states related to the playability of the advantageous section. is provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 36, the general gameplay of the second gaming machine will be explained. In most cases, a player starts playing from a normal state. In the normal state, the player first plays a game with the aim of transitioning to the RB state or BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state. During that time, the state may shift to a precursor state or a CZ state. If the transitioned pseudo-bonus state is the RB state, if the RB state ends as it is, the advantageous section also ends, and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. The standby state is positioned as a state in which the transition to the advantageous section (that is, the playing of the game during the advantageous section) is waited. In other words, transitioning to the standby state means that it is necessary to play the game again in the same manner with the aim of transitioning to the RB state or BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state.

If the transitioned pseudo-bonus state is the BB state, or if the RB state is promoted to the BB state, when the BB state ends, the state shifts to the AT state. The AT state consists of one set (one unit) of 30 games, and when one set of games is played, the game shifts to the judge state. In the judge state, a determination is made as to whether or not to extend the AT state. When it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state, the AT state may be extended to the next set via the BB state, or the AT state may be extended to the next set as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the judge state not to extend the AT state, the advantageous section ends and the process shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. That is, the series of advantageous states consisting of the BB state and the AT state ends.

The second gaming machine is also equipped with a game limiter of ``1500 (plays)'' and a payout limiter of ``2400 (pieces),'' and the number of games played during the advantageous period (value of the advantageous period game number counter) When the number of games exceeds 1,500, or when the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous period (the value of the number of payouts in the advantageous period counter) exceeds 2400, the advantageous period is forcibly ended, and the non-advantageous period is on standby. to move to. However, in the BB state, AT state, and Judge state, if the net increase in the number of sheets during the advantageous period reaches 1800 or more, the ending transition condition is met and the transition to the ending state occurs, until the advantageous period is forcibly ended. The ending state continues. Then, when any of the limiters is activated in the ending state, the advantageous section ends and the vehicle shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

That is, the player aims to transition to the BB state, and after the end of that state, the AT state will be extended (extended) (if extended via the BB state, a more favorable gaming result will be obtained). Furthermore, if the AT state shifts to the ending state as a result of consecutive wins, medals can be acquired until the limiter is activated. The above is the general gameplay.

(standby state)
Next, the standby state of the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. As described above, the standby state is configured as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section.

In the standby state, for example, an advantageous section transition lottery, a ceiling bonus type lottery, a ceiling game number lottery, and an initial NP lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

<Advantageous section transfer lottery>
In the standby state, an advantageous section transition lottery is carried out to determine whether or not to proceed to the advantageous section every game. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described below, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the internal winning combination is "miss", "replay", and " If the internal winning combination is one of "special", it is not decided to move to the advantageous section, and when the internal winning combination is other, it is always decided to move to the advantageous section. In addition, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, it is also determined whether the advantageous section to which the transition destination will be transferred is made into a normal state or a precursor state (i.e., via each precursor state, the CZ state, RB state, or BB state) can be determined. Of course, it can also be configured such that in the lottery, it can be determined to shift to the CZ state, RB state, or BB state without going through the precursor state.

Although this is just an example, in this lottery, for example, when the internal winning combination is either the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later, it is determined to shift to the normal state of the advantageous section, and the internal When the winning combination is one of "Cherry", "Watermelon" and "Chance" described below, it is decided to move to the CZ state of the advantageous section, and when the internal winning combination is "Strong Bell" described below, it is advantageous. It can be configured such that it is determined to move to the RB state of the section, and when the internal winning combination is a "determined hand" described later, it is determined to move to the BB state of the advantageous section. Further, in this case, it may also be determined whether or not to go through the precursor state. Furthermore, in either case, the transition to one of the states may be determined by lottery based on predetermined probabilities. In either case, the number of portent games in the portent state is determined by the lottery (or the number of portent games lottery, which is a separate lottery) within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 32 games). The number of games may be determined, or a predetermined number of games may be set.

<Ceiling bonus type lottery>
In the standby state, if it is determined to shift to an advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, a ceiling bonus type lottery is performed. The second gaming machine is also equipped with a so-called ceiling function, and if the number of games played in an advantageous section without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state reaches the ceiling number of games, it will shift to a pseudo-bonus state. It has become a thing. The lottery determines the type of pseudo-bonus state to which the game is transferred in this case. For example, the number of ceiling games starts counting when the game shifts to the advantageous section, and is cleared when the game shifts to the pseudo-bonus state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, the probability of reaching the ceiling is 50%, for example, according to a predetermined probability. The type of the pseudo bonus state at the time is determined to be the RB state, and the type of the pseudo bonus state when the ceiling is reached is determined to be the BB state with a remaining 50% probability.

<Ceiling game number lottery>
In the standby state, when a ceiling bonus type lottery is performed, a ceiling game number lottery is performed. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, a number of games can be selected from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 640 games). The number of games played is determined. Further, in the lottery, the result of the ceiling bonus type lottery may be referred to. For example, when the result is the RB state, a relatively short number of games may be determined more easily than when the result is the BB state. In addition, in the lottery, multiple numbers of games such as 1 to 128 games, 129 to 256 games, 257 to 384 games, 385 to 512 games, 513 to 640 games, etc. are selected so that players can easily gauge their expectations. Zones may be defined, and the number of games within a predetermined zone (for example, 129 to 256 games or 385 to 512 games) may be relatively easily determined as the ceiling number of games.

<Initial NP lottery>
In the standby state, if it is determined to shift to an advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, an initial NP lottery is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to determining whether or not to shift the normal state to a more advantageous state (for example, a CZ state or a pseudo-bonus state) (in other words, information that contributes to determining whether or not to shift the normal state to a more advantageous state (for example, a CZ state or a pseudo-bonus state) (in other words, to change the degree of advantage in the normal state) It is possible to assign points called ``NP'' as information on ``NP''. Then, when the advantageous section starts, it is possible to give an initial value of NP. This lottery determines the initial value of this NP. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, the lottery is performed with a probability according to the internal winning combination, for example, "30 ”, “50”, “70”, or “99”. However, it is also possible to allow "0" (that is, no NP is given) to be determined as the lottery result. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine “100” (that is, the maximum value of NP is given) as the lottery result.

As mentioned above, when it is decided to move to the advantageous section in the standby state, if the transfer destination is in the normal condition (advantageous section start (normal)), the transfer destination will be transferred to the normal condition from the next game, and the transfer destination will be in the normal condition. If it is in a precursor state (beginning of advantageous section (precursor)), it will move to the precursor state from the next game (as mentioned above, if it is possible to transition without going through the precursor state, it will change from the next game to the target game state. Transition).

(Normal state)
Next, the normal state of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. As described above, the normal state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

In the normal state, for example, an NP grant lottery, a NPMAX time lottery, a winning combination lottery, a portent game number lottery, and a normal state transition lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

As described above, the normal state is the gaming state in which the player normally stays the most, and is the gaming state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported. In this way, even in an advantageous section, a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (in other words, a gaming state in which the number of medals does not increase or is difficult to increase due to the notification of stop operation information) is a "performance section" of the advantageous section. It is also sometimes referred to as a "normally advantageous section."

<NP grant lottery>
In the normal state, an NP grant lottery is performed to determine whether or not to grant NP in each game. As mentioned above, NP is a point as information for changing the degree of advantage in the normal state, and in the second gaming machine, if the cumulative value of the given NP is "100" or more, the following A lottery is held at the time of NPMAX, and a transition to another advantageous gaming state may be determined. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, descriptions of specific lottery tables related to the lottery are omitted, but in the lottery, the lottery is performed with a probability according to the internal winning combination, for example, ” to “99”, the value given to any NP is determined. However, it is also possible to make it so that "0" (that is, no NP is given) cannot be determined as the lottery result. Furthermore, it is also possible to determine “100” (that is, the maximum value of NP is given) as the lottery result. In addition, in this lottery, in addition to the internal winning combination, for example, the "bell series" described below (i.e., the number of consecutive displays of "bell" (including the case where it is displayed once)) is used to determine the "bell series". It is also possible to make it possible to determine the value given to NP depending on the number of players.

<NPMAX Time Lottery>
In the normal state, if the cumulative value of NP becomes "100" or more as a result of the NP grant lottery, the NPMAX time lottery is performed. Here, when the lottery is performed, NP is initialized (cleared to 0) regardless of the lottery result. That is, in the normal state, each time the awarded NP reaches a predetermined value (100 or more), a decision is made as to whether or not to award a benefit to the player. Note that in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, a transition to any game state is made according to a predetermined probability. transition to the BB state via the precursor state (as mentioned above, there may be cases where the precursor state is not passed through); transition to the CZ2 state via the precursor state (the precursor state may not be passed through); As mentioned above, there may be cases where the process does not go through the state.

Note that the CZ state that transitions when the assigned NP reaches a predetermined value (100 or more) basically corresponds to the CZ2 state, but in the lottery, It may be possible to decide to transition to the CZ1 state (as described above, there may be cases where the transition does not go through the precursor state). In addition, in this lottery, it is assumed that the transition to the RB state via the precursor state (as mentioned above, it is possible not to go through the precursor state) is not determined, but this may be determined. You can do it like this.

<Lottery by established role>
In the normal state, in each game, a winning combination lottery is performed to determine whether or not to award a benefit in accordance with the determined internal winning combination (achieved combination). In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, which game transition to the BB state via the precursor state (as mentioned above, there may be cases where the precursor state is not passed through); transition to the CZ1 state via the precursor state (It is possible to do so without going through the precursor state as described above).

Note that the CZ state that is transitioned to in response to a winning in the lottery by established role basically corresponds to the CZ1 state, but in the relevant lottery, it is possible to transition to the CZ2 state via the precursor state. (As described above, there may be cases where the precursor state is not passed) may be determined. In addition, in this lottery, it is assumed that the transition to the RB state via the precursor state (as mentioned above, it is possible not to go through the precursor state) is not determined, but this may be determined. You can do it like this.

<Lottery for the number of omen games>
In the normal state, if it is determined in the above-mentioned NPMAX time lottery or realized role-specific lottery to move to any gaming state via the precursor state, a precursor game number lottery is performed. That is, the game period of the precursor state is determined. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 32 games), The number of games played is determined. Further, in the lottery, the gaming state of the transfer destination may be referred to. For example, when the CZ state is to be transitioned through the precursor state, a relatively short number of games may be determined more easily than when the BB state is the state.

<Normal state transition lottery>
In the normal state, the transition probability to the CZ state is varied, so there is a CZ1 high probability state where the probability of transition to the CZ1 state is given preferential treatment, and a CZ1 low probability state where the probability of transition to the CZ1 state is lower than the CZ1 high probability state. There are provided a CZ2 high probability state in which the probability of transition to the CZ2 state is preferentially treated, and a CZ2 low probability state in which the probability of transition to the CZ2 state is lower than the CZ2 high probability state.

In addition, various aspects can be adopted as the aspect in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is preferentially treated in the CZ1 high probability state. For example, in the CZ1 high probability state, the probability of transitioning to the CZ1 state may be given more preferential treatment than in the CZ1 low probability state in the winning combination lottery, or the probability of transitioning to the CZ1 state in the NPMAX time lottery may be set higher. The probability that the CZ1 is determined may be given more preferential treatment than the CZ1 low probability state.

Moreover, various aspects can be adopted as the aspect in which the transition probability to the CZ2 state is preferentially treated in the CZ2 high probability state. For example, in the CZ2 high probability state, the granting of NP may be given preferential treatment in the NP granting lottery (it becomes easier to win the granting of NP, or the amount of NP granted when winning becomes relatively large). However, the probability that it will be decided to move to the CZ2 state in the NPMAX time lottery may be given preferential treatment than the CZ2 low probability state, or the probability that it will be decided to move to the CZ2 state in the lottery by established role. may be treated more preferentially than the CZ2 low probability state.

Furthermore, the CZ1 low/high certainty state and the CZ2 low/high certainty state are managed separately. Therefore, in the normal state, (a) CZ1 low certainty state + CZ2 low certainty state, (b) CZ1 high certainty state + CZ2 low certainty state, (c) CZ1 low certainty state + CZ2 high certainty state, (d) CZ1 high certainty state + CZ2 There is a possibility that the situation will be in one of the high probability states. In the normal state, the states of the CZ1 low-certainty/high-certainty state and the CZ2 low-certainty/high-certainty state may be suggested or reported individually or in combination. That is, in the normal state, an effect may be performed that makes it possible to guess or recognize which state is in (a) to (d) above, or at least in the case of (a) above. By making the content different between cases (b) to (d) above, it becomes possible to infer or recognize that one is staying in one of the more advantageous states. (d) An effect that makes it difficult to guess or recognize which location the user is staying in may be performed.

Furthermore, the CZ1 high probability state and the CZ2 high probability state may be configured to continue for a predetermined number of games, respectively, and when staying in each state, the falling lottery may not occur in the normal medium state transition lottery. It may be configured such that the duration is determined as the process occurs. The former case will be described below as an example.

In the normal state, when the CZ1 is in the low probability state, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the CZ1 high probability state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, CZ1 high probability is determined according to a predetermined probability for each winning combination. It is determined whether or not to transition to the state, and if it is determined to transition, the number of games played (for example, one of "10", "20", or "30" games) is determined. . Further, in the normal state, when the CZ2 low probability state is selected, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery for determining whether to shift to the CZ2 high probability state. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, descriptions of specific lottery tables related to the lottery are omitted, but in the lottery, for example, CZ2 high probability is determined according to a predetermined probability for each winning combination. It is determined whether or not to transition to the state, and if it is determined to transition, the number of games played (for example, one of "10", "20", or "30" games) is determined. .

As described above, in the normal state, when it is determined to shift to the CZ state or pseudo-bonus state, the state shifts to the corresponding precursor state (precursor transition). Note that, as described above, if it is possible to transition without passing through the precursor state, the target game state will be transitioned from the next game.

Here, the triggers for transitioning from the normal state to other gaming states will be listed and explained again.
(1) When the number of games played without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state reaches the ceiling number of games (in this case, the transition to the precursor state is made for a predetermined number of games before reaching the ceiling number of games) good)
(2) If you win to change the gaming state in the NPMAX lottery (3) If you win to change the gaming state in the lottery by established role )

That is, in the second gaming machine, there is always a possibility that the above-mentioned triggers (1) to (3) will occur in the normal state, and the probability of transition to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state may change. Therefore, players can always play games with high expectations.

(premonitory state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, the precursor state in the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, the precursor state is configured as a gaming state in an advantageous section.

In the precursor state, for example, an NP grant lottery, a NPMAX lottery, and a successful combination lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

As mentioned above, the precursor state is a gaming state in which a transition to the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, RB state, or BB state has been determined, but the transition is on standby, and there is no stopping operation that is advantageous to the player. This is a gaming state in which information is not reported. That is, it is a gaming state that constitutes the above-mentioned "performance section" or "normally advantageous section." Note that the CZ1 precursor state indicates a precursor state of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 precursor state indicates a precursor state of the CZ2 state, the RB precursor state indicates a precursor state of the RB state, and the BB precursor state indicates a precursor state of the BB state. Indicates the condition.

The NP grant lottery, the NPMAX time lottery, and the realized role-specific lottery in the precursor state are basically the same as those in the normal state, so their explanations are omitted here, but for example, in the precursor state, the above-mentioned (1) When the triggers (3) to (3) are established and a transition destination that is more advantageous than the currently determined transition destination is determined, the precursor state is rewritten to the precursor state corresponding to the transition destination. In this case, the number of precursor games may be newly determined, or may be inherited as is.

For example, in the CZ1 precursor state or CZ2 precursor state, if it is determined to transition to the RB state or BB state, the precursor state is rewritten to the RB precursor state or the BB precursor state. Further, for example, when it is determined to transition to the BB state in the RB precursor state, the precursor state is rewritten to the BB precursor state. In such a case, since a precursor effect is executed in the precursor state, it is possible to notify the player by executing a promotion effect that suggests that the player has been promoted to a more advantageous state. good.

Further, the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state may be distinguished from each other, or may not be distinguished. For example, if it is decided to transition to the CZ2 state in the CZ1 precursor state, and if the CZ2 state is more advantageous than the CZ1 state, then even if the precursor state is rewritten to the CZ2 precursor state, If it is true that the CZ2 state and the CZ1 state are not superior or inferior, or that the CZ2 state is more disadvantageous than the CZ1 state, then the result of the decision to transition to the CZ2 state is discarded and the CZ1 precursor state is created. You can leave it as is. In addition, in this case, the result of the decision to transition to the CZ2 state is stored (stocked) as a right, and if the CZ1 state that transitions from the CZ1 precursor state does not transition to the pseudo-bonus state, The stored right may be consumed and the CZ2 state may be started.

In addition, in the RB precursor state, if it is determined to transition to the BB state, when rewriting the precursor state, the result of determining to transition to the RB state will be discarded, but this is not limited to this. , the result of deciding to move to the BB state is stored as a right, and after the RB state is executed, the stored right is consumed and the BB state is started. It's okay. In addition, in the BB precursor state, if it is decided to move to the BB state, no rewriting will occur, and the result of the decision to move to the BB state later will be discarded, but this is not limited to this. , the result of later deciding to move to the BB state is stored (stocked) as a right, and after the BB state is executed, the stored rights are consumed and the BB state is started. You can also do this.

As described above, when games for the determined number of precursor games are played in the precursor state (number of precursor Gs = 0), a transition is made to the gaming state corresponding to each precursor state (CZ start, RB start, or BB start).

(CZ1 state)
Next, the CZ1 state in the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36 and 38. As described above, the CZ1 state is configured as a gaming state in the advantageous section.

The basic gameplay in the CZ1 state is as follows.
(1) One set (one unit) of seven games is defined as the CZ1 normal state.

(2) In the CZ1 normal state, the BB lottery in CZ1 is performed. The BB lottery in CZ1 is a lottery in which it is determined whether or not to move to the BB state according to a predetermined probability for each winning combination in each game, and if the lottery is won, it becomes a CZ success and the player enters the CZ1 state. is completed, and the next game shifts to the BB state.

(3) In the CZ1 normal state, the CZ1 Navi lottery is performed. The CZ1 Navi lottery determines whether or not to execute Navi in the final state of CZ1 according to a predetermined probability for each game and each established combination, and if Navi is executed, the type of Navi (4-choice Navi, 2-choice Navi, 2-choice Navi, etc.) Selected navigation, all navigation) is determined. That is, in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined whether to grant navigation rights in the CZ1 final state.

(4) After playing 7 games in the CZ1 normal state, if the "push order bell" described later is won (if the push order bell is established), the game moves to the CZ1 final state (1 game).

(5) In the CZ1 final state, if it is determined by the CZ1 navigation lottery to execute navigation, navigation is executed with the determined content, and if it is not determined to execute navigation, navigation is executed. In either case, if a "bell" is displayed, it is determined that the CZ is successful and a transition to at least a pseudo-bonus state is made. Here, in the CZ1 state, it is possible to loop the above-mentioned CZ1 normal state → CZ1 final state up to three times, the first loop is "Rank 1", and the second loop is "Rank 2". ”, the third and final time is defined as “Rank 3”.

(6) If CZ is successful in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed. The CZ1 reward lottery is a lottery to determine the content of the benefit (the type of pseudo-bonus state to which the player will transition) in the event of a successful CZ in the CZ1 state, and the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player will be given the benefit. It looks like this.

(7) If CZ is successful at rank 1, a CZ1 reward lottery will be held and the type of pseudo-bonus state to which the player will move will be determined, but the player will not immediately move to the pseudo-bonus state, but will rank up and move to rank 2. In this state, the CZ1 normal state is entered again (the second time is started). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 1 (i.e., if "bell" is not displayed in the CZ1 final state), the CZ1 state ends without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, and the state shifts to the normal state. (ie, the CZ1 state fails and exits). In this case, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed to determine the normal state of the transition destination (CZ1 low/high certainty state, CZ2 low/high certainty state). Note that the normal state transition lottery is basically the same as that in the normal state, so the explanation here will be omitted, but for example, in the lottery in the CZ1 state, it is assumed that the CZ1 state has failed and ended. In order to provide relief, it may be determined that the CZ1 high probability state will always occur (or with high probability) for a predetermined number of games.

(8) If CZ is successful at rank 2, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than rank 1, and the type of pseudo bonus state to which the transition destination is transferred is determined. However, in this case, as in the case of rank 1, the state does not immediately shift to the pseudo-bonus state, but shifts to the CZ1 normal state again after increasing the rank to rank 3 (the third time is started). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 2, the state shifts to a pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery at rank 1 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with rank 1 success).

(9) If CZ is successful at rank 3, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than rank 2, and the type of pseudo bonus state to which to transfer is determined. Then, the state shifts to a pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery for rank 3 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with rank 3 success). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 3, the state shifts to a pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery at rank 2 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with rank 2 success).

<CZ1 middle BB lottery>
In the CZ1 state, a CZ1 medium BB lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the BB state in accordance with the determined internal winning combination (achieved combination) in each game. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, a weak rare combination ("Cherry" or "Watermelon" described later) is selected. When winning a prize, it is determined that the game will transition to the BB state with a low probability, and when winning a strong rare role ("chance eye" or "strong bell" described later), it is determined that the game will transition to the BB state with a medium probability. When a confirmed winning combination (described later as a "determined winning combination") is won, it is determined that the game will move to the BB state with 100% (or high probability). Note that when it is determined to transition to the BB state, the transition to the BB state may be made through the precursor state, or without passing through the precursor state. In the former case, the state may be shifted to the BB precursor state after the number of precursor games has been played, and in the latter case, the state may be shifted to the BB state from the next game.

<CZ1 Navi Lottery>
In the CZ1 state, each game (excluding the CZ1 final state), the CZ1 navigation is used to determine whether to execute the navigation in the CZ1 final state (and its type) according to the determined internal winning combination (achieved combination). A lottery will be held. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, "No navigation ", "4-choice navigation,""2-choicenavigation," or "all navigation." For example, if the right to "2-choice navigation" is granted, the right to "4-choice navigation" will not be granted (or even if it is decided to grant it, it will be canceled), and the right to "all navigation" will not be granted. If the right is granted, the right to "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation" will not be granted (or even if it is decided to grant it, it will be canceled). That is, in the CZ1 normal state, although the CZ1 Navi lottery is performed for each game, the most advantageous Navi right granted during the game period will ultimately be used in the CZ1 final state.

<CZ1 reward lottery>
When "bell" is displayed in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed. As described above, in the lottery, the type of pseudo bonus state to which the player is transferred is determined in accordance with the current rank. In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, when rank 1 is determined, the CZ2 reward lottery (see FIG. 42 described later) ) The type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is "5" in rank 2, and when the rank is 2, the type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is "8" in the CZ2 reward lottery, When the rank is 3, the type of reward can be determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is "15 to 19" in the CZ2 reward lottery.

In this way, in the CZ1 state, for example, in the CZ1 normal state, the CZ1 medium BB lottery and the CZ1 medium Navi lottery are performed, and in the CZ1 final state, the CZ1 reward lottery and the normal medium state transition lottery are assumed to be performed. These lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these. In addition, it is possible to make it possible to transition from the BB state or AT state to the CZ1 state, and in the CZ1 state, the right to extend the BB state or AT state can be granted (the relevant CZ1 state After the process is finished, it returns to its original state).

In addition, the CZ1 state is a gaming state in which there is a higher expectation that the CZ1 reward lottery will shift to a pseudo-bonus state than in the normal state, but basically information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not reported. It is in a gaming state. Therefore, the CZ1 state is a gaming state that constitutes the above-mentioned "performance section" or "normally advantageous section" as its overall structure. However, in the final state of CZ1, there is a possibility that the number of medals will increase due to the notification of information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player, so if only this state exists, it is an advantageous section and is not advantageous for the player. It can also be said that this is an "increase section" which is a gaming state (in other words, a gaming state in which the number of medals increases or is likely to increase due to notification of stop operation information).

As described above, when the CZ1 state is started, it becomes the CZ1 normal state, and in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined that if the BB lottery in CZ1 is won, the state shifts to the BB state. Also, if you win the CZ1 navigation lottery, you will be granted the right to execute any navigation. In this way, after playing 7 games in the CZ1 normal state, if you win the "push order bell" described later, you will enter the CZ1 final state, and if you have been granted the navigation execution right in the CZ1 final state, you will be able to play according to the content of the right. Navigation is executed, and if it is not given, navigation will not be executed. In either case, if a "bell" is displayed, the CZ is successful, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be transitioned to is determined by the CZ1 reward lottery. Note that in the case of rank 3, the CZ1 state ends as is, but in the case of rank 1 and rank 2, the CZ1 state is ranked up and continues in the next set. Further, if "bell" is not displayed in the CZ1 final state, if the rank is 1, the CZ fails and the CZ1 state ends. Furthermore, if the CZ is successful even once (in the case of rank 2 or rank 3), the state shifts to a pseudo-bonus state of the type determined up to then. In this case, if it is determined to move to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the precursor state, the transition is made to the corresponding precursor state. On the other hand, when the CZ1 state ends and there is no CZ success and CZ failure, the state shifts to the normal state.

Note that in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 challenge effect is performed to suggest to the player that a benefit will be awarded if a "bell" is finally displayed. The CZ1 challenge effect basically continues until the third stop operation, and if a "bell" is finally displayed as a result of the third stop operation, the challenge success effect is performed. However, if the pressing order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, and the stop display mode of the stopped reels becomes such that "bell" can no longer be displayed (for example, If the "bell" symbol does not stop within the main display window 4, or if the "bell" symbol does not stop on a specific line, the player recognizes that the "bell" can no longer be displayed. (in the case where the CZ1 challenge effect is stopped and displayed), a challenge failure effect is performed at that point and the CZ1 challenge effect ends. On the other hand, if the pressing order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, but the stop display mode of the stopped reel is such that "bell" can still be displayed (for example, when the main When the "bell" symbol stops within the display window 4, or when the "bell" symbol stops on a specific line, the stop display is made in a manner that allows the player to recognize that the "bell" may still be displayed. ), the challenge failure effect will not be performed at that point, and the CZ1 challenge effect will continue until the "bell" cannot be displayed (for example, if the situation occurs during the second stop operation). If the situation occurs during the second stop operation, the challenge failure effect is performed during the third stop operation.

In other words, in a predetermined expectation presentation (CZ1 challenge presentation), if there is no longer a possibility that a benefit will be awarded from the perspective of so-called results, a failure presentation is executed at that stage (predetermined expectation presentation). However, if there remains a possibility that a benefit will be awarded, the failure performance will not be executed (the predetermined expectation performance will not end) until that possibility is eliminated. This makes it possible to perform an appropriate expectation effect as the game progresses. Note that the performance specifications for such anticipation performance can be applied not only to the CZ1 final state but also to performances executed in other states. For example, in another state, if you win a specific push order combination (for example, "Push Order Bell") and a specific result (for example, "Bell") is displayed, you will be given some kind of benefit. In addition, in a state where "all navigation" may not occur (for example, CZ2 normal state, AT state, or judge state), a similar challenge performance may be performed using the above specifications. .

(CZ2 state)
Next, the CZ2 state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 38, 40, and 42. As described above, the CZ2 state is configured as a gaming state in the advantageous section.

The basic gameplay of the CZ2 state is as follows.
(1) Count the number of times the "bell" is not displayed (number of times the bell is spilled) in a game where you win the "push order bell" described later, and one set (one unit) is counted until the number of times the bell is spilled is 7 times. (Different from the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state is completed in one set), and this is defined as the CZ2 normal state.

(2) In the CZ2 normal state, a CP grant lottery is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to determining whether or not to shift the CZ2 state to a more advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) (in other words, information for varying the degree of advantage in the CZ2 state) It is possible to award points called "CP". In the CP grant lottery, it is determined whether or not to grant this CP. As described later, the CZ award lottery includes an initial award CP lottery, a normal CP award lottery, and a special CP award lottery, and the details of the lottery will be described later.

(3) In the CZ2 normal state, a CZ2 Navi lottery is performed. In the CZ2 state, basically, when you accumulate CP in the CZ2 normal state and move to the CZ2 final state when the number of bell spills reaches 7, the CP grant status must be in a predetermined state (5 points or more). For example, if the CZ is successful, the player enters a pseudo-bonus state. One of the conditions for awarding CP in the CZ2 normal state is that a "bell" is displayed in a game in which the player wins the "push order bell" described later. In the CZ2 medium navigation lottery, when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the CZ2 normal state, it is determined whether to notify information on a stop operation that is advantageous for displaying "bell". Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

(4) In the CZ2 normal state, if it is decided to move to a pseudo-bonus state before one set is exhausted, the state will move to the pseudo-bonus state that it was decided to move to, but the said decision is made. If one set is completed without any problems, the game moves to the CZ2 final state, which consists of one game. In the CZ2 final state, a CP award lottery is performed. That is, the CP cumulatively added in the CZ2 normal state may be further added in the CZ2 final state.

(5) In the CZ2 final state, the result of the CP grant lottery in that state is also taken into consideration, and if the cumulatively added CP is 5 points or more, the CZ2 reward lottery is performed. The CZ2 reward lottery is a lottery to determine the content of the benefit (the type of pseudo-bonus state to which the player will transition) in the event of a successful CZ in the CZ2 state, and the greater the number of CP points, the more advantageous the benefit to the player will be. It is now granted. On the other hand, in the CZ2 final state, if the cumulatively added CP is less than 5 points even after taking into account the results of the CP award lottery in that state, the CZ2 reward lottery will not be performed and the CZ will fail. The CZ2 state ends (in this case, similar to the case where the CZ1 state ends due to CZ failure, a normal state transition lottery is performed to determine each state in the normal state of the transition destination. Also, in this case In the lottery in the CZ2 state, it may be determined that the CZ2 high probability state will be reached for a predetermined number of games without fail (or with high probability) in order to compensate for the failure and termination of the CZ2 state. ).

<CP grant lottery>
As described above, the CP grant lottery includes the initial CP grant lottery, the normal CP grant lottery, and the special CP grant lottery. The initial CP grant lottery is performed when the CZ2 state is started (for example, at the start of the CZ2 normal state game or when transitioning to the CZ2 state), and determines the initial value of CP in the CZ2 state. Further, the normal CP award lottery is performed in every game during the CZ2 state (including not only the CZ2 normal state but also the CZ2 final state). Further, the special CP grant lottery is performed in the CZ2 final state.

The initial CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. is determined), "1" to "3" are each determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256, and "5" is determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256 (that is, a pseudo The transfer to the bonus status is confirmed). Note that these decision probabilities and decision details are merely examples. For example, it may be determined that CP exceeding 5 points will be awarded with a predetermined probability as the lottery result of the lottery.

The normal CP award lottery is performed, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. 42, and when the display result is "Bell" (that is, when the symbol combination of "Bell" is stopped and displayed by the player's stop operation). , when the internal winning combination of the game is "Strong Bell", which will be described later, CP "1" is always awarded. In addition, in these cases, the CP grant value may be determined separately by lottery. For example, if the display result is "Bell", it is determined that CP "1" will be given with a probability of 128/256, and it is decided that CP "2" will be given with a probability of 128/256, Also, if the internal winning combination of the game is "Strong Bell", it is determined that CP "1" will be awarded with a probability of 64/256, and CP "2" will be awarded with a probability of 192/256. It may be decided to do so.

Furthermore, if the internal winning combination of the game is a "confirmed combination" described later, a CP of "10" is always awarded. Note that in this case, the CP grant value may be determined separately by lottery. For example, if the internal winning combination of the game is a "determined combination", it is determined that CP "10" will be awarded with a probability of 128/256, and CP "20" will be awarded with a probability of 128/256. It may be decided to do so.

In addition, in the normal CP award lottery, the target roles for CP award are the "Press Order Bell", "Common Bell", "Strong Bell", and "Confirmed Role" described below, but are not limited to these, for example, It may also be configured such that CP may be awarded with a predetermined probability even when "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Chance", etc. are determined as internal winning combinations. Further, the same applies when an internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown here is determined, and the same applies when a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown here is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, using the "number of consecutive bells" (that is, the number of consecutive displays of "bell" (including the case where it is displayed once)), which will be described later, the value of CP given can be determined according to the "number of consecutive bells". (In other words, the more times "bell" is displayed in succession, the greater the CP grant value becomes).

The special CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the special CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of awarding CP is different in cases where the bonus is 5 or more (in other words, when the CZ2 reward lottery is performed and it can be determined to move to the pseudo-bonus state). The granted value is determined. In addition, the granted CP "set = 5" indicates that the CP will be updated to "5" regardless of the current cumulative CP grant result, and the granted CP "+5" or "+10" is the same as the current CP. This indicates that each value is added to the cumulative CP granting result.

That is, for example, when the current CP is 4 or less, the system moves to the CZ2 final state, and even if this does not become 5 or more depending on the result of the normal CP grant lottery, "Cherry" or "Watermelon", which will be described later, will be won. If possible, "Set = 5" will be determined with a probability of 232/256, "+5" will be determined with a probability of 16/256, and "+10" will be determined with a probability of 8/256, so CZ2 reward A state can be established in which a lottery can be held. Also, for example, if the current CP is 5 or more and you move to the CZ2 final state, the CZ2 reward lottery will still be held, but if you win "Cherry" or "Watermelon" as described below If it is possible, "+5" will be determined with a probability of 16/256 and "+10" will be determined with a probability of 8/256, so the rewards (benefits) obtained by CZ2 reward lottery may be more advantageous. You can increase your sexuality. In other words, regardless of the game result in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 final state is configured as a state that can significantly improve the player's expectations.

Although not shown, in the CZ2 state, notification of the current CP allocation status is performed to suggest or notify the current CP allocation status (this is basically the same for the above-mentioned NP and the below-mentioned AP). For example, a gauge-like display is made in a predetermined area of the main performance display section 21, and if the state is CZ2, the gauge is divided into five parts.For example, if the current CP is "1", one part is displayed. If the display mode of the gauge changes and the current CP is "2", the display mode of the two gauges changes to notify the CP grant status. Also, if the current CP is "5" or more, the display mode of the five gauges will change, and if the current CP is "5" to "9" or "10" to "14". It is possible to indicate the CP granting status by changing the display mode (lighting up, blinking, color change, etc.) depending on whether the number is 15 or 15 to 19. . In addition, in the notification of the grant status, only the results of the normal CP grant lottery may be reported or suggested without taking into account the results of the initial CP grant lottery, or all the results of the initial CP grant lottery may be reported or suggested. The notification or suggestion may be made with some consideration taken into consideration, or the result of the initial CP grant lottery may be partially taken into account (for example, only 1/2 of the granted value is notified). You can also do this.

In addition, in the final state of CZ2, the current CP grant status is reported to be 4 points or less in the relevant grant status notification, but there is a CP grant value that has not been reported, and when this is taken into account, the CP is 5 points or less. In the case of points or more, even if the result of the CP award lottery in the CZ2 final state is that no CP is awarded, the notification will be made as if CP was awarded in the CZ2 final state and 5 points or more were obtained. It may also be done. Of course, if it is reported that the current CP granting status is 4 points or less, and the actual CP granting status is also 4 points or less, the CP will be 5 points or more depending on the result of the CP granting lottery in the CZ2 final state. In such a case, similar notification may be made.

<CZ2 Navi Lottery>
As mentioned above, the CZ2 Navi lottery is performed in every game during the CZ2 normal state, and when you win the "Press Order Bell" described later, information on stop operations that are advantageous for displaying the "Bell" (correct answer press). It is determined whether or not to broadcast information indicating all or part of the order. Note that this determination is made by determining the navigation state, which will be described later, in the lottery. Also, when a "common bell" (described later) is won, a similar notification will be made depending on the navigation state (described later).

As shown in FIG. 42, in the CZ2 normal state, the navigation states include navigation state 0 which is a no-navigation state, navigation state 1 which is a 4-choice navigation state, navigation state 2 which is a 2-choice navigation state, and navigation state 2 which is a 2-choice navigation state. , Navi state 3 is a state in which all Navi can occur once (all Navi state 4 is a state in which all Navi can occur twice, all Navi state 5 is a state in which all Navi can occur three times, etc.). The last value is added depending on the number of navigation items).

Here, in the second gaming machine, the "push order bell" is configured as 6 choices (3 choices for first stop operation x 2 choices for second stop operation x 1 choice for third stop operation), and is configured as "4 choice navigation". ” indicates that a navigation is generated in which the first stop operation has two choices and the second stop operation has two choices. For example, when the correct answer press order is "left middle right (123)" and a 4-choice navigation occurs, before the first stop operation, "left or middle" including the correct answer "left" or "left A navigation system is executed in which a notification prompting the user to perform either the stop operation "or right" (i.e., there are two choices) is performed, and before the second stop operation, information on the stop operation is not announced (i.e., there are two choices). It has become something that will be done. In other words, in terms of probability, the probability of getting the correct answer on your own in the order in which you press the correct answer is 1/6 in the no-navigation condition, whereas in the 4-choice navigation condition (by following the navigation) it is advantageous in that it increases to 1/4. becomes.

Further, "two-choice navigation" indicates that navigation with two options for the second stop operation occurs. For example, when the correct pressing order is "left middle right (123)" and a two-choice navigation occurs, before the first stop operation, the stop operation that indicates that the correct pressing order is "left" Information is reported, and before the second stop operation, information on the stop operation is not reported (that is, there are two choices). That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the probability of getting the correct answer on your own in the order in which you press the correct answers is increased to 1/2 in the two-choice navigation state (by following the navigation). In addition, "all navigation" indicates that a navigation that notifies all of the correct pressing order is generated. For example, when the correct press order is "left middle right (123)" and all navigation occurs, stop operation information indicating that "left" is the correct press order before the first stop operation is notified, and before the second stop operation, information on the stop operation indicating that "Medium" is the correct pressing order is executed. That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the possibility of getting the correct answer on your own in the correct order of pressing is improved to 1/1 in the full navigation state (by following the navigation).

In the CZ2 normal state, for example, by referring to each CZ2 medium navigation lottery table shown in FIG. ”) and determines the navigation assignment result. For example, in a state without navigation (navigation state 0), when the internal winning combination of the game becomes a "lose", it is determined that the probability is 214/256 that it will be a "non-win" (that is, maintain navigation state 0). "4-choice navigation" (that is, setting navigation state 1) is determined with a probability of 24/256, and "2-choice navigation" (that is, setting navigation state 2) with a probability of 12/256. is determined, and "one navigation system for all" (that is, setting navigation state 3) is determined with a probability of 6/256.

Also, for example, in the 4-choice navigation state (navigation state 1), when the internal winning combination of the game is a "loss", there is a probability of 214/256 that it is a "non-winning" (that is, the navigation state 1 is maintained). ) is determined, "two-choice navigation" (that is, setting navigation state 2) is determined with a probability of 24/256, and "one navigation for all" (that is, setting navigation state 3) is determined with a probability of 12/256. It is determined that "all three navigations" (that is, to set navigation state 5) is determined with a probability of 6/256.

In addition, when navigation state 1 (4-choice navigation state) is set, if "push order bell" or "common bell" described below is determined as an internal winning combination, 4-choice navigation will be executed and the final If "bell" is displayed, the navigation state 1 is maintained, but if "bell" is not displayed in the end, the navigation state 1 ends and the navigation state 0 (navigation state 0) is maintained. None state) is set.

In addition, when navigation state 2 (2-choice navigation state) is set, if "push order bell" or "common bell" described below is determined as an internal winning combination, 2-choice navigation will be executed and the final If "bell" is displayed, the navigation state 2 is maintained, but if "bell" is not displayed in the end, the navigation state 2 ends and the navigation state 0 (navigation state 0) is maintained. None state) is set. However, if the "bell" is not displayed in the end when navigation state 2 is set, the navigation state will be lowered by one (the navigation state will be subtracted by 1 and the transition will be made to navigation state 1). You can also do it like this.

In addition, when navigation state 3 (1 total navigation count in all navigation states) is set, if "push order bell" or "common bell" described below is determined as an internal winning combination, all navigation will be executed. Regardless of whether or not the "bell" is finally displayed, once all navigation has been executed, the navigation state is subtracted by 1 and the transition is made to navigation state 2 (i.e., the navigation state is decreased by 1). fall). However, if all the navigations are executed while navigation state 3 is set, the navigation state 3 can be ended and navigation state 0 (no navigation state) can be set.

In addition, when navigation state 4 (all navigation times 2 in all navigation states) is set, if "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as an internal winning combination, all navigation will be executed. Regardless of whether the "bell" is finally displayed or not, once all the navigation has been executed, the navigation state is subtracted by 1 and the transition is made to navigation state 3 (in other words, the navigation state is changed by 1). fall). The same applies to the navigation state 5 or higher. As a result, for example, in navigation state 3, execution of all navigation is guaranteed once, in navigation state 4, execution of all navigation is guaranteed twice, and in navigation state 5, execution of all navigation is guaranteed three times. . However, if a navigation state of 4 or higher is set and all the navigations have been executed the corresponding number of times, the navigation state will end and navigation state 0 (no navigation state) will be set. You can also do that.

Furthermore, each navigation state is configured so that it will not fall after it is set until at least a "push order bell" or a "common bell", which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination. That is, for example, once navigation state 1 is set, that navigation state 1 will be maintained until the 4-choice navigation is executed at least once (however, if the navigation state is increased by the navigation lottery during CZ2, (This is not limited to this.)

Note that the mode of the CZ2 Navi lottery is not limited to that described above. For example, in a game where the "push order bell" or "common bell" described later is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to execute the navigation, and if so, which navigation to execute. Good too. For example, similar to the all-navigation state lottery in the AT state described later, the number of games in which 4-choice navigation can occur, the number of games in which 2-choice navigation can occur, and the number of games in which all-choice navigation can occur can be determined by the number of games or the set number of games in which all-choice navigation can occur. In the CZ2 Navi lottery, such a lottery for the number of games and the number of sets may be performed.

<CZ2 reward lottery>
As mentioned above, the CZ2 reward lottery is carried out in the CZ2 final state when the final cumulative value of CP in the CZ2 state is 5 points or more, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be transitioned to is determined. Ru. The CZ2 reward lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the CZ2 reward lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and the type of pseudo-bonus state is determined with a probability according to the cumulative value of CP (cumulative CP).

For example, when the cumulative CP is "5", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination will be "RB state" with a probability of 244/256, and the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination will be "RB state" with a probability of 8/256. It is determined that the transition destination pseudo bonus state will be the "strong BB state" with a probability of 4/256.

For example, when the cumulative CP is "8", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination will be "weak BB state" with a probability of 232/256, and the pseudo bonus state of the transfer destination with a probability of 24/256. It is determined that the state will be a "strong BB state". Also, for example, when the cumulative CP is "10" to "14", it is determined that the pseudo bonus state at the destination will be "strong BB state" with a probability of 254/256, and the probability of the transition is 2/256. It is determined that the previous pseudo-bonus state will be the "freeze BB state".

Here, the pseudo bonus state in the second gaming machine will be explained. Broadly speaking, the second gaming machine has an RB state and a BB state as pseudo bonus states. The BB state includes a "weak BB state", a "strong BB state", and a "freeze BB state". Both the RB state and the BB state are configured as gaming states that last for 21 games (the playing period is set to 21 games), but in the RB state, the "push order bell" described later is determined as an internal winning combination. In contrast to the game state in which the correct pressing order is not necessarily announced (including cases in which only a portion is reported) in a game where the correct answer is pressed, the BB state is a game state in which the "pressing order bell" described later is determined as an internal winning combination. It is more advantageous for the player than the RB state in that it is a gaming state in which the correct pressing order is always reported (or at least the correct pressing order may be notified with a higher probability than the RB state). It is in a gaming state.

Furthermore, although details are omitted, the strong BB state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the weak BB state, and the freeze BB state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the strong BB state. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is configured such that a frozen BB state is high, a strong BB state is medium, and a weak BB state is low. Note that in each BB state, various methods can be employed to vary the degree of advantage of the player. For example, it can be set so that the higher the advantage, the longer the gaming period, or it can be set so that the higher the advantage, the higher the probability that all navigation will occur. In addition, in the second gaming machine, after the BB state ends, it is assumed that the AT state is always entered. Therefore, in the various types of lottery described below in the AT state, the AT state is likely to be extended, and the AT state is extended. It is also possible to set conditions that are advantageous as appropriate, such as increasing the probability of passing through the BB state or increasing the probability of all navigation occurring in the AT state. In addition, in the case of the second gaming machine, when it is simply explained that "it is decided to move to the BB state", one of the above-mentioned BB state types is determined according to predetermined conditions. It is assumed that this has been decided.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, in the weak BB state, a reel effect in which the "red 7" pattern alignment is stopped and displayed (for example, a red 7 alignment effect during lock) is executed. The strong BB state and the freeze BB state are started after a reel performance in which a set of "Blue 7" symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, a blue 7 set display during lock) is executed. It has become a thing. Therefore, from this point of view, there is a difference between the red 7BB state (weak BB state) which starts with a red set of 7 and the blue 7BB state (strong BB state and freeze BB state) which starts with a blue set of 7. The degree of advantage may be made different. In this case, in addition to the above-mentioned method, for example, in the red 7BB state, only one right to execute the AT state is granted (i.e., although the AT state will be transitioned to after the end of the red 7BB state, the AT state will not be extended. On the other hand, in the blue 7BB state, the right to execute the AT state is granted multiple times (that is, after the completion of the AT state, the AT state is entered, and the AT state is is confirmed to be extended by at least one set), so that the blue 7BB state is more advantageous than the red 7BB state.

In addition, the right to execute the AT state granted by the blue 7BB state, for example, if there is one right to execute the AT state granted by the red 7BB state, at least two or more may be granted; The determination method can also be set as appropriate. For example, in the blue 7BB state, a predetermined number (for example, two) of AT state execution rights may be granted, or a grant lottery (for example, the number of grants may be "2" to "11"). '') may be carried out, and the right to execute the AT state may be granted in a given number according to the lottery result. In addition, the award lottery is made to be performed also in the red 7BB state (in this case, for example, one of "1" to "11" is determined as the award number), and the award lottery is made to be performed in the red 7BB state. It is also possible to make it easier to obtain a more advantageous lottery result in the award lottery in the blue 7BB state, so that the degrees of advantage of the two are different. Further, by creating a similar difference between the strong BB state and the frozen BB state, the degree of advantage of the two states may be made to differ. In short, when the BB state starts, when red is a set of 7, the expectation that the AT state will be extended is relatively low, and when it becomes a blue set of 7, it is less likely to be extended than when it becomes a red set of 7. The degree of expectation that the AT state will be extended is made relatively high. Furthermore, when a long freeze occurs when the blue 7 is set, the expectation that the AT state will be extended can be made relatively higher than when a long freeze does not occur.

In the CZ2 reward lottery, as described above, the greater the cumulative value of CP awarded in the CZ2 state, the easier it is to determine a pseudo-bonus state that is more advantageous to the player.

In this way, in the CZ2 state, for example, in the CZ2 normal state, a CP award lottery and a CZ2 medium navigation lottery are performed, and in the CZ2 final state, a CP grant lottery, a CZ2 reward lottery, and a normal medium state transition lottery are performed. However, these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these. In addition, it is possible to make it possible to transition from the BB state or AT state to the CZ2 state, and in that CZ2 state, the right to extend the BB state or AT state can be granted (the relevant CZ2 state After the process is finished, it returns to its original state).

In addition, the CZ2 state is a gaming state in which there is a higher expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state than the normal state due to the CZ2 reward lottery being performed, and a gaming state in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified. It is. Therefore, it can be said that the game state is configured as the above-mentioned "increase section," but considering the frequency with which the navigation is executed, the possibility that the number of medals will increase is not necessarily high. This is the gaming state that constitutes the "performance section" or the "normally advantageous section". However, it is possible to configure the overall configuration of the CZ2 state as an "increase section" by adjusting the frequency at which navigation is executed.

As described above, when the CZ2 state is started, the CZ2 normal state is entered, and in the CZ2 normal state, a CP award lottery (initial CP award lottery at the start of the CZ2 state, normal CP award lottery during the CZ2 state) is performed. Furthermore, if you win the CZ2 Navi lottery, you will be given a navigation execution right (navigation state), and you will be notified of information on a stop operation that corresponds to the granted navigation execution right. This also changes the result of the CP award lottery. In the CZ2 normal state, when the number of times the "bell" was won but the "bell" could not be displayed, which will be described later, reaches 7, the CZ2 final state is entered. In the CZ2 final state, if you have finally acquired 5 or more CP points, it will be a CZ success, the type of pseudo-bonus state to transition to will be determined by CZ2 reward lottery, and you will transition to the determined type of pseudo-bonus state. . In this case, if it is determined to move to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the precursor state, the transition is made to the corresponding precursor state. On the other hand, in the CZ2 final state, if 5 or more CP points have not been obtained in the end, CZ fails and the state shifts to the normal state.

<Example of game flow in CZ2 state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, an example of the flow of the game in the CZ2 state will be described. FIG. 40(a) is an example of a case where CZ fails in the CZ2 state, and FIGS. 40(b) to (d) are examples of a case where CZ is successful in the CZ2 state.

Note that in (a) to (d) of FIG. 40, the "number of games progress" indicates the pure progress of the number of games played, and the "number of remaining games" indicates that the number of games remaining remains in the CZ2 state due to an increase in the number of times the bell is spilled. This indicates that the number of possible games will decrease, the "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game, and the "display result" will change depending on the player's stop operation. It shows the finally displayed stop display mode (symbol combination), "CP" shows the cumulative value of CP, and the game state shows that the corresponding game is CZ2 normal state and CZ2 final state. This indicates which gaming state the game is in.

In (a) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that CP "2" is assigned by the initial CP assignment lottery. Further, in the second game (2G), although the player wins the "push order bell", the "bell" is not displayed (the bell is spilled), and the number of remaining games is reduced. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Furthermore, in the fifth game (5G), since the "bell" was won in the "push order bell" and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery. Furthermore, in the 8th game (8G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery.

Although illustration is omitted in (a) of FIG. 40 (the same applies to (b) to (d) below unless otherwise specified), a game in which the "push order bell" or "common bell" is won In some cases, one of four-choice navigation, two-choice navigation, and all-choice navigation is being executed, and there are also cases where none of them is being executed.

In (a) of FIG. 40, "2" is assigned as the initial value of CP, but in the CZ2 normal state, the CP is "1" each in the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G). In addition, in the 11th game (11G), the number of bells spilled was 7 times, and the state moved to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and even in the CZ2 final state, no CP was awarded. Since the final CP is "4", the CZ2 reward lottery is not performed (no transition is made to the pseudo-bonus state), resulting in a CZ failure.

In (b) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that CP "2" is assigned by the initial CP assignment lottery. Furthermore, in the second game (2G), although the player wins the "push order bell", the "bell" is not displayed (the bell is spilled), and the number of remaining games is reduced. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Furthermore, in the fourth game (4G), since the "bell" was won in the "push order bell" and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery. The same applies to the fifth game (5G). Furthermore, in the 8th game (8G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery.

In FIG. 40(b), "2" is assigned as the initial value of CP, and in the CZ2 normal state, the CP is increased in the 4th game (4G), the 5th game (5G), and the 8th game (8G) is given "1" each time, and in the 11th game (11G), the number of bells spilled becomes 7 times and moves to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and no CP is given in the CZ2 final state. However, the final CP is "5", so the CZ2 reward lottery is performed (it is decided to move to the pseudo-bonus state), and the CZ is successful.

In (c) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that no CP is awarded in the initial CP granting lottery. Further, in the second game (2G), although the player wins the "push order bell", the "bell" is not displayed (the bell is spilled), and the number of remaining games is reduced. The same applies to the third game (3G), the sixth game (6G), the seventh game (7G), the ninth game (9G), the tenth game (10G), and the eleventh game (11G). Furthermore, in the fifth game (5G), since the "bell" was won in the "push order bell" and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery. Furthermore, in the 8th game (8G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, it is assumed that CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP awarding lottery.

In (c) of FIG. 40, no initial value of CP is given, and in the CZ2 normal state, CP is given by "1" in each of the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G). In addition, in the 11th game (11G), the number of bells spilled was 7 times, and the state moved to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and the CP so far was "2", In the final state of CZ2, winning the "Watermelon" gave 5 CP, and the final CP became 7, so the CZ2 reward lottery will be held (transition to pseudo-bonus state) (determined), resulting in CZ success.

In (d) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that CP "5" is assigned by the initial CP assignment lottery. That is, at this point, it is certain that CZ is successful, but the CZ2 state does not end immediately. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 40, it is assumed that by winning "Watermelon" in the first game (1G), the player has won "3 total navigation items" in the CZ2 medium navigation lottery. In addition, in the second game (2G), you win the "Push Order Bell", all navigations are executed (all navigations are reduced to 2 remaining), "Bell" is displayed, and the normal CP award lottery gives you CP "1". ” is assumed to have been given. Also, in the third game (3G), you win the "push order bell", all navigations are executed (all navigations are reduced to 1 remaining), "bell" is displayed, and the normal CP award lottery gives you CP "1". ” is assumed to have been given.

Furthermore, in the fourth game (4G), it is assumed that the player wins the "strong bell" and is given CP "1" by the normal CP award lottery. Here, too, a CZ2 middle navigation lottery is performed by winning the "strong bell", and for example, it is assumed that "one total navigation" is won in the lottery (the number of total navigation increases to two remaining). Also, in the 5th game (5G), you win the "push order bell", all navigations are executed (all navigations are reduced to 1 remaining), "bell" is displayed, and the normal CP award lottery gives you CP "1". ” is assumed to have been given. Also, in the 6th game (6G), you win the "Press order bell", all navigations are executed (all navigations are reduced to 0 remaining), "bell" is displayed, and the normal CP award lottery gives you CP "1". ” is assumed to have been given. The cumulative value of CP up to this point is "10".

In FIG. 40(d), it is assumed that in the seventh game (7G), the player wins the "determined combination" and is awarded a CP of "10" in the normal CP awarding lottery. In the second gaming machine, if the cumulative value of CP becomes "20" or more in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 state is exceptionally ended with the game even if there are still a number of games remaining, The most advantageous "freeze BB state" is determined as the type of pseudo bonus state, and the freeze BB state is assumed to start from the next game.

<Game machine using CZ2 state gameplay>
In the second gaming machine, by using the above-mentioned CZ2 state gameplay, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, a pseudo-bonus state (e.g., RB state or BB state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and a CZ2 state in which the degree of expectation that the transition condition for the pseudo-bonus state is satisfied is higher than in the normal state. The prescribed termination conditions for the CZ2 state include the number of times the "bell" is not displayed (the number of times the bell is spilled) in a game in which "Press Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination reaches 7. It is.

Note that the number of times the bell is spilled, which is the specified termination condition, is not limited to seven times, but can be set as appropriate. Further, even if a winning combination other than the "push order bell" (for example, "watermelon", "cherry", etc.) is missed, the number of times may be counted.

For example, in a game where "Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "Bell" is displayed, but when an incorrect push order is different from the correct push order, the "bell" is displayed. If the stop operation is performed in order, a symbol combination different from "Bell" will be displayed, and if "Press Order Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination in the CZ2 state, it will be advantageous to display "Bell". This is a gaming machine that can notify information on stop operations (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, and all-choice navigation).

Note that the "push order bell" is configured with 6 selections in the order of pressing, but it may also be configured with 3 selections (only for the type of first stop operation), 12 selections or 24 selections (other than the pressing order). In addition, the timing of the stop operation (the pressed position) may also be configured by providing a correct position and an incorrect position. In the latter case, some navigation systems will notify you of the correct pressing order, but the pressed position (position of landmarks such as red 7, blue 7, or black BAR) (in other words, the type of specific symbol to aim for) ) can be configured as a navigation that does not notify you.

Furthermore, although the target combination for the specified end condition is the small combination "Push Order Bell", it can also be configured as a "Push Order Replay" which is a replay combination. In this case, for example, if the stop operation is performed in the correct press order, "Bell Replay" is displayed, but if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect press order, which is different from the correct press order, "Bell Replay" is displayed. ”, a different symbol combination (for example, “Normal Replay”) can be displayed.

Also, for example, in a game where "Press Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, if information on a stop operation that is advantageous for displaying "Bell" is to be announced, "All Navi" will notify all of the correct press orders. This is a gaming machine that sometimes performs "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation" as partial navigation in which a part of the correct answer press order is notified.

For example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, if a "bell" is displayed in a game in which partial navigation is performed, the state in which the partial navigation can be performed (for example, the navigation state This is a gaming machine that continues navigation state 1 and navigation state 2), and ends the state in which partial navigation can be performed if the "bell" is not displayed.

Note that the termination condition for terminating the state in which partial navigation may be performed is not limited to this. For example, the game may continue for a guaranteed number of games, and the end condition may be that the guaranteed number of games is used up. In addition, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination related to "Bell" is determined, a continuation lottery (end lottery) will be held in every game, and if it is decided to continue, it will continue, and if it is decided to end, it will continue. You can also use this as a termination condition. Further, any one of these termination conditions can be used, or a combination of them can be used.

Further, for example, the game machine is capable of determining a "common bell" in which a "bell" can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation as an internal winning combination.

Further, for example, if a "bell" is displayed, it is a gaming machine that can provide "CP" which is a benefit that contributes to transition to a pseudo-bonus state.

Further, for example, it is a gaming machine that can award "CP" in response to the start of the CZ2 state.

Furthermore, for example, the gaming machine is capable of awarding "CP" even when a "determined combination" in which "bell" cannot be displayed is determined as an internal winning combination.

Note that the conditions for granting "CP" are not limited to these. For example, a CP grant lottery (for example, similar to the normal CP grant lottery) is performed even in the CZ2 precursor state, and when transitioning from the CZ2 precursor state to the CZ2 state (CZ2 normal state), the CP grant lottery is performed in the CZ2 precursor state. It is also possible to make it possible for the "CP" to be taken over to the CZ2 state. For example, even in the CZ2 normal state, if a rare role other than the "confirmed role" is determined as an internal winning combination, a CP granting lottery that is different from the normal CP granting lottery (for example, similar to a special CP granting lottery) is performed. You can also make it so that it appears. In addition, in the CZ2 state, a freeze occurrence lottery is held, and if the freeze occurrence lottery is won and the freeze is executed, a predetermined value (for example, 5 points) of "CP" may be given. can. That is, if a predetermined condition is satisfied depending on some game result, "CP" may be awarded with a predetermined probability.

Further, for example, in the CZ2 state, when the "CP" awarding situation reaches 5 points or more, which is a predetermined situation, it is a gaming machine in which a transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined.

Note that the number of "CP" points for which transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, when the CZ2 state is started, the number of points may be determined by lottery, and the number of points may vary.

In addition, for example, the CZ2 state is configured so that even after the "CP" grant status reaches a predetermined state, it can continue until the specified termination conditions are met, and when the specified termination conditions are met, the "CP" It is configured to shift to a pseudo-bonus state when the grant status is in a predetermined state, and even after the "CP" grant status reaches the predetermined state, it is possible to grant "CP", and there is no pseudo-bonus state. , there are multiple types with different advantages (for example, RB and BB), and when the specified end conditions are met, if there are more "CP" grant situations, it will be in a pseudo-bonus state with a higher advantage. It is a gaming machine that is easy to transfer.

In addition, for example, in the CZ2 state, if the specified termination condition is met before the "CP" grant status reaches the predetermined state, in the CZ2 final state, at least it is determined whether or not the "CP" grant status becomes the predetermined state. It is a game machine that can be determined.

Note that the conditions under which it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state are not limited to these even if the specified end conditions are satisfied before the "CP" granting state reaches the predetermined state. For example, when the CZ2 final state ends with the cumulative value of "CP" remaining "0" in the CZ2 state, it may be determined to shift to the pseudo bonus state.

(RB state)
Next, the RB state in the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36 and 39. As described above, the RB state is a gaming state that is configured as an advantageous section gaming state, and is also a gaming state that is structured as the above-mentioned "increase section" in which one set has 21 games.

In addition, in the starting game in the RB state, in response to the start operation being performed, a reel effect in which a set of "white BAR" symbols is displayed ("RB reel with lock number "6" shown in FIG. 58 described later) After "action 1" or "RB reel action 2" of lock number "7") is performed, the game in the RB state is started.

In the RB state, for example, a BB promotion lottery and an RB mid-navi lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

<BB promotion lottery>
In the RB state, a BB promotion lottery is performed every game to determine whether to promote the pseudo bonus state to the BB state (more specifically, whether to move from the RB state to the BB state). In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the "special" (described later) or the weak rare combination ("cherry", which will be described later), ” or “Watermelon”), it is determined that the game will go to BB state with a low probability, and when it wins a strong rare role (“chance eye” or “strong bell” described later), it will go to BB state with a medium probability. It is determined that the game will move to the BB state with 100% (or high probability) when it is determined that the winning combination has been won.

Here, when the player wins the BB promotion lottery in the RB state and moves to the BB state from the next game, the game period in the BB state starts from the beginning. For example, if it is decided to move to the BB state at the 11th game after playing 10 games in the RB state, the next game will be the 1st game instead of the 12th game in the BB state (i.e., the RB state and BB status, the number of games in the set will not be carried over). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of games in the set may be inherited between the RB state and the BB state. That is, for example, if it is determined to shift to the BB state at the 11th game after playing 10 games in the RB state, the next game may be configured to be the 12th game in the BB state.

<RB Navi Lottery>
In the RB state, in a game in which "Push Order Bell" (described later) is determined as an internal winning combination,
An RB navigation lottery is performed to determine whether to notify information on a stop operation (information indicating all or part of the correct pressing order) that is advantageous for displaying the "bell". In addition, in FIGS. 42 to 46 described later, the description of the specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted, but in the lottery, for example, the current AP is "less than 80" and the probability is the same as when "Press Order Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination (the probability may be different, but the "increasing section" is maintained. The type of navigation to be executed is determined based on the probability.

As mentioned above, the RB state is a gaming state that constitutes an "increasing section" in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is reported, but "all navigation" is not necessarily achieved in a game in which the "push order bell" is won. It is configured as a gaming state that may not occur. Although "all navigation" always occurs, by configuring it as a gaming state with a shorter playing period (less number of games per set) than the BB state, there will be a difference between it and the BB state. Alternatively, the BB state is a gaming state that can be extended, but the RB state can be configured as a gaming state that cannot be extended, so that there is a difference between the BB state and the BB state.

As described above, in the RB state, if it is decided to move to the BB state before the end of the RB state, the RB state moves to the BB state (BB promotion), and the RB state does not move to the BB state. When the game ends after 21 games have been played, the RB ends, the advantageous period also ends, and a transition is made to the standby state of the non-advantageous period (RB ends).

Note that in the RB state, there may be a case where the number of medals expected by the player or intended in the design is not paid out due to uneven occurrence of navigation. For this reason, when the number of medals paid out in the RB state becomes less than a specific amount (threshold value) and the RB state ends, it is assumed that a transition to the BB state is exceptionally determined. Further, the specific amount can be set arbitrarily, but it is assumed that it is set to "0 sheets" as an example. In addition, as another example, "21 cards" (or "42 cards" if it is 2 or less) indicates that the net increase in number of cards during the RB state was 1 or less per game, with the same purpose. It is possible to relieve the players and suppress a decline in interest.

(BB state)
Next, the BB state in the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36, 39, and 43. As described above, the BB state is a gaming state that is configured as an advantageous section gaming state, and is also a gaming state that is configured as the above-mentioned "increase section" in which one set has 21 games.

In addition, in the starting game in the BB state, in response to the start operation being performed, the reel effect in which the "Red 7" pattern alignment is displayed (the "Low BB for ``Reel Action''), or a reel effect in which the ``Blue 7'' pattern alignment is displayed (see ``Reel Action 2 for Strong BB'' with lock number ``11'' shown in Figure 58 below) is performed, and then the corresponding BB The state game is to be started.

In the BB state, for example, an initial AP lottery and a special AT lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

<Initial AP lottery>
In the second gaming machine, in the AT state, a point called "AP" is used as information that contributes to determining whether or not to extend the AT state (in other words, information for changing the degree of advantage in the AT state). It is possible to grant. The initial value of "AP" can be assigned even in the BB state where the device stays prior to the start of the AT state. Note that the initial AP lottery includes an initial AP mode lottery that is performed at the time of the so-called first win, and an initial AP grant lottery that is performed every time the state shifts from the BB state to the AT state.

The first AP mode lottery is performed, for example, when the first BB state is started after transitioning from the precursor state, CZ state, or RB state (not including the case where the state transitions to the BB state as a result of extension of the AT state from the judge state). This is performed to determine the AP mode for varying the degree of advantage of the initial AP grant lottery (described later) (for example, when starting a game in the BB state or when transitioning to the BB state). Note that the AP mode once determined is maintained until the advantageous section ends with no extension in the judge state. That is, the AP mode constitutes one piece of information for determining the advantageous degree of "AP" grant in a series of advantageous states consisting of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state).

The first AP mode lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the first AP mode lottery table shown in FIG. is to be determined.

Here, the advantageous section mode will be explained. The advantageous section mode is information determined as one of the lottery elements of the above-mentioned advantageous section transition lottery when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. This information is configured as information for varying the advantageous degree of the advantageous section (particularly the advantageous degree in the AT state) until the transition to the advantageous section. The second gaming machine is provided with three types of modes, for example, advantageous section mode A, advantageous section mode B, and advantageous section mode C. This mode is to be set. Note that which mode is more advantageous varies depending on each lottery (see FIGS. 43 to 46 described later), but relatively speaking, advantageous section mode A seems to be the most advantageous mode. (This is not limited to the lottery value shown in the figure. Which lottery and which advantageous section mode is advantageous can be changed as appropriate.)

Next, the AP mode will be explained. As shown in FIG. 43, each AP mode is associated with lottery pattern information (“1” to “4”) in the initial AP grant lottery for each number of AT sets. As will be described later, in the initial AP grant lottery, the lottery pattern "4" is the most advantageous, the lottery pattern "3" is the next most advantageous, and the lottery pattern "2" is the lottery pattern "4". Although it is more disadvantageous than the case of lottery pattern "3", it is more advantageous than the case of lottery pattern "1", and the case of lottery pattern "1" is the most disadvantageous. Therefore, each AP mode is more advantageous for the player if it is associated with a more advantageous lottery pattern.

For example, in "AP mode 1", lottery pattern "3" is associated with "5th set", but lottery pattern "1" is associated with other AT set numbers, so the AT state is If 4 sets continue and it is decided that the AT state will be extended via the BB state in the judge state after the end of the 4th set, (the next time will be the 5th set), the initial lottery pattern "3" will be applied. The player can receive the AP award lottery, but in other cases, only the initial AP award lottery based on the lottery pattern "1" can be accepted. In addition, when you first transition from the BB state to the AT state (first set), you can always receive the initial AP grant lottery, but here too, the initial AP grant by lottery pattern "1" This is something that can only be accepted by lottery.

On the other hand, for example, in "AP mode 9", there are no AT sets associated with lottery pattern "1", and lottery pattern "3" is associated with odd-numbered sets, so there are multiple AT states. Continuing, if it is decided that the AT state will be extended via the BB state in the judge state after the end of the even-numbered set, the initial AP granting lottery will be based on lottery pattern "3" (as the next time is the odd-numbered set). It is possible to receive the following. Also, when you first transition from the BB state to the AT state (first set), you can always receive the initial AP grant lottery, but here too, the initial AP grant by lottery pattern "3" It is possible to receive a lottery.

Furthermore, when focusing on the number of AT sets, in each AP mode, there are many cases in which the lottery patterns of odd-numbered sets are relatively advantageous. Therefore, when the AT state is played consecutively, if the odd numbered set can be extended to include the BB state, the expectation that the AT state can be played more consecutively increases (by giving an initial value of AP). In this way, by creating fluctuations in the provision of the initial value of AP, it is possible to create a state in which the player's expectation of continuing the AT state is further increased, and the interest in the game can be increased. Note that from this point of view, the relatively advantageous number of AT sets is not necessarily limited to odd-numbered sets. For example, the first set (or the number of AT sets in the first half) is advantageous because the lottery patterns "3" and "4" are associated (or there are many associations), but the number of AT sets after the second set (or the number of AT sets in the second half) is The number of sets) may be set such that the number of correspondences with lottery patterns "3" and "4" is small (or there is no correspondence), so that at least two or more sets of AT states are likely to continue. Also, for example, the number of AT sets in the second half is advantageous because there are many correspondences with lottery patterns "3" and "4", but the number of AT sets in the first half is advantageous because there are many correspondences with lottery patterns "3" and "4". It may be possible to reduce the number so that the AT state is easy to continue after the AT state continues for a certain set of times.

The initial AP grant lottery refers to the AP mode determined as described above, and when the BB state ends (for example, the last game in the BB state or when transitioning to the AT state), the end of the BB state is determined. This is done to determine the initial value of "AP" in the AT state to which the transition will occur later.

The initial AP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial AP grant lottery table shown in FIG. The initial value (initial AP) of ``0'' (that is, no initial AP is assigned), ``20'', or ``40'' is determined. Note that the initial AP is not limited to this, and for example, "80", at which the extension of the AT state is determined, may be determined with a predetermined probability.

<Special AT lottery>
In the second gaming machine, when it is decided to extend the AT state in the AT state, the extended AT state is a special AT state in which "all navigation" always occurs in one set of 30 games (in other words, For example, the gaming period is defined as 30 games, and there are cases where a pseudo bonus state (which can also be called a special BB state) in which "all navigation" always occurs. Note that after the special AT state ends, the next set of normal AT states is always entered (extension of the AT state is confirmed). In addition, in the subsequent judge state, the lottery result of the Navi lottery during the judge described below will be given one level of preferential treatment (for example, if "No navigation" is determined, this will be given one level of preferential treatment and become "4-choice Navi", If "4-choice navigation" is decided, it will be given one step preferential treatment and become "2-choice navigation", and if "2-choice navigation" is decided, it will be given one step preferential treatment and become "all-choice navigation") It looks like this.

In the AT state (and judge state) immediately before it is decided whether or not to transition to the special AT state, special characters that do not normally appear will appear in the AT state (and judge state) to indicate that the transition will be made to the special AT state if extended. A special character performance will be executed.

Then, in the special AT lottery, in a series of advantageous states consisting of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state), the AT state in which the above-mentioned special character performance is executed (i.e., whether the transition to the special AT state It is possible to determine whether or not the AT state (AT state) will appear (activate) or not, and if it does appear (activate), what set of AT state will be set. ing. Note that, similar to the above-mentioned initial AP mode lottery, these lotteries (activation lottery and activation set lottery) are performed at the so-called first time winning.

The activation lottery is performed by referring to the activation lottery table shown in FIG. 43, for example, and the probability is that it will be activated (“winning”) or not activated (“non-winning”) depending on the current advantageous section mode. One of these is determined. If it is determined to be activated as a result of the activation lottery, an activation set lottery will be conducted.

The activation set lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the activation set lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the number of sets to be activated (the number of AT sets) is determined. For example, if it is decided to activate in the 4th set and the AT state can be extended to the 4th set, the AT state becomes the AT state in which the above-mentioned special character production is executed, and When it is determined that the AT state will be extended in the judge state after the AT state has expired, it becomes possible to shift to the special AT state.

As described above, in the BB state, when the BB state ends after playing 21 games, the state shifts to the AT state (BB end). Note that although the second gaming machine is assumed to always transition to the AT state after the BB state ends, it may be configured so that the transition to the AT state may not occur. Furthermore, although it is assumed that the playing period in the BB state does not change, for example, an extension lottery may be held during the BB state, and if the lottery is won, the number of games in the BB state may be extended. However, one set can be regarded as 21 games, and the BB state can be extended by the number of sets.

(AT state and judge state)
Next, the AT state and the judge state in the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 36, 39, 41, and 44 to 46. As described above, the AT state is a gaming state that is configured as an advantageous section gaming state, and is also a gaming state that is configured as the above-mentioned "increase section" where one set is 30 games. Further, the judge state is a gaming state in which it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the AT state.

In the AT state, for example, promoted state lottery, AT state lottery, AP grant lottery, Lv. 5 Promotion Lottery, All Navi Status Lottery, and AT Navi Lottery will be held. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

Further, in the judge state, for example, a judge mid-navigation lottery, a judge reward lottery, a judge final resurrection lottery, and an all-navigation state lottery are performed. Note that these lotteries are just examples, and it is also possible to configure the system so that a lottery other than these is performed, or to not perform any one of these.

The basic gameplay of the AT state and judge state is as follows.
(1) First, when the set in the AT state starts, the promotion lottery (Lv. 5 promotion lottery) in the set is set to be given preferential treatment (promotion high certainty state) or not. (Whether it is a promoted normal state) is determined according to the lottery result of the promoted state lottery. Note that the lottery can be performed at the same timing as the initial AP grant lottery described above.

(2) Also, when the set in the AT state starts, whether the various lottery decisions related to AP granting in the set will be given preferential treatment (AP high probability state) or not. (Whether the AP should be in the normal state) is determined according to the lottery result of the AT state lottery. Note that the lottery can be performed at the same timing as the initial AP grant lottery described above.

(3) Also, in the AT state, an AP grant lottery is performed. The AP grant lottery includes the initial AP grant lottery described above, the AP grant lottery (when a bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when a strong bell is displayed), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when a self-help bell is displayed) described below. , details of the lottery will be described later. In the AT state, AP is basically awarded when a "bell" is displayed, and when the set ends, if the cumulative AP value is 80 or more, including the initial AP value, the judge If "Lv.4" is set as the level and the cumulative value of AP is "60" to "79", "Lv.3" is set as the judge level and the cumulative value of AP is "40" to "59". In this case, "Lv.2" is set as the judge level, and if the cumulative value of AP is "20" to "39", "Lv.1" is set as the judge level, and the cumulative value of AP is "0". ~ In the case of "19", "Lv.0" is set as the judge level. Note that the judge level will be described later. In addition, if the cumulative value of AP is "80" or more, "Lv. 4" will be uniformly set as the judge level, and the judge level "Lv. 5" will not be set according to the cumulative value of AP. However, it is not limited to this. For example, if the cumulative value of AP is "80" to "99", "Lv.4" is set as the judge level, and if the cumulative value of AP is "100" or more, "Lv.4" is set as the judge level. .5" may be set.

(4) Also, in the AT state, Lv. 5 promotion lottery will be held. Lv. 5 promotion lottery determines whether "Lv. 5" is set as the judge level regardless of the current accumulated AP value (in other words, whether the judge level is set to the highest level by one-shot lottery). It is a lottery to decide. Note that the lottery can also be configured as a lottery of whether or not to grant "100" AP. That is, it can also be configured as one type of AP grant lottery.

(5) Furthermore, in the AT state, all navigation state lottery is performed. The all-navigation state lottery determines whether or not a state (all-navigation state) in which "all navigation" can be executed occurs when the "push order bell" is won in the AT state, and if so, for how long. It is a lottery to decide whether to do so. As described above, in the AT state, AP is given when the "bell" is displayed, so when the full navigation state occurs, AP is inevitably given more easily. That is, the full navigation state is configured as a state in which it is easier to obtain medals, and is also configured as a state in which the AT state is more likely to be extended. Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

(6) Also, in the AT state, an AT navigation lottery is performed. AT navigation lottery is a lottery for determining whether to execute "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation") even when the above-mentioned full navigation state is not present. There is. Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

(7) In this way, in the AT state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous for displaying the "bell" is notified when the full navigation state is in effect, and also when the "bell" is not displayed in the full navigation state. Information on an advantageous stop operation may be reported, and the AP grant status changes depending on whether such information on the stop operation is reported. Of course, even if the player selects the correct pressing order on his/her own and a "bell" is displayed, the AP grant status will also change. Then, in the AT state, when the 30 games of the set are played, a judge level is set according to the cumulative value of AP, and the game shifts to the judge state. In addition, if the number of games in all navigation states remains when the 30 games of the set are played, the AT state of the set will be extended until the number of games in all navigation states becomes 0 (judge state). APs may be added even during the extension. Also, Lv. If you win the 5 promotion lottery, "Lv. 5" is set as the judge level regardless of the accumulated AP value.

(8) In the judge state, if "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" is set as the judge level, it is determined that the AT state will be extended. Also, if "Lv. 3" is set as the judge level, the "Number of judges" is set to 3, and if "Lv. 2" is set as the judge level, "Number of judges" is set to 3. " is set to twice and "Lv.1" is set as the judge level, the "number of times to judge" is set to once. Note that the "number of times of judgement" means the number of times a decision is made as to whether or not to extend the AT state in the judge state. In addition, even if "Lv. 0" is set as the judge level, the "number of times to judge" is set to 1, but in this case, in the judge navigation lottery described later, if the judge level is "Lv. 1". A lottery is performed that is more disadvantageous than the case, and is configured so that there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the "Lv. 1" case and the "Lv. 0" case.

(9) In the judge state, the extension is basically determined by the game that wins the "Push order bell" described later, and if the "bell" can be displayed in the game, the extension is successful (extension is not allowed). is determined), a judge reward lottery is performed, and the manner in which the extension is extended (for example, the "continuation type" described later, passing through the BB state, etc.) is determined. In addition, even if you win a rare combination that includes "Common Bell" or "Strong Bell", etc., which will be described later, a decision will be made as to whether or not the extension will be successful, and a judge reward lottery will be held in the same way, and the extension will be extended. The aspect is determined. In addition, if "Lv. 4" or "Lv. 5" is set as the judge level, a decision is made as to whether or not the extension will be successful in all roles, and a judge reward lottery is also conducted in the same way. , the manner in which it is extended is determined. That is, in the judge state, the AT state is extended if the result of the determination of extension is successful before the judge state ends without extension.

(10) On the other hand, in the judge state, if a game that wins the "push order bell" (described later) is used to determine whether or not to extend the game, and if the "bell" cannot be displayed in that game, the result of the decision to determine whether or not to extend the game is determined. will result in an extension failure. In this case, "1" is subtracted from the number of times of judgment. Then, when the number of times of judgment becomes "0", a transition is made to the final judgment state for one game. In other words, if the judge level is "Lv. 3", you will be given three opportunities to decide whether to extend the contract, and if the judge level is "Lv. 2", you will be given two opportunities to decide whether to extend the contract. If the judge level is "Lv. 1" or "Lv. 0", you will be given only one opportunity to decide whether to extend the period.

(11) Furthermore, in the judge state, whether or not a "bell" can be displayed in a game in which a "push order bell" (to be described later) is won varies depending on whether or not navigation is executed in the game. Therefore, in the judge state, a judge Navi lottery is performed. For example, in the judging navigation lottery, you can decide whether to execute "all navigation" or some navigation (for example, "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation") in a game where you win the "push order bell" described later. It is a lottery to decide. Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

(12) In the judge final state, a judge final resurrection lottery is performed. The judge final resurrection lottery is a lottery in which the manner in which the AT state is extended is determined when a predetermined rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the judge final state. In other words, even if all of the results of the decision on whether or not to extend in the judge state are extension failures, if the predetermined rare combination can be won in the final game, the extension of the AT state will be decided (AT state (continues to be revived). Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

(13) In addition, if it is decided that the AT state will be extended in the judge state (including the judge final state), depending on the type of reward, all navigation states (sets of An all-navigation state lottery may be performed to determine the number). Note that details of the lottery will be described later.

<Promotion status lottery>
For example, when the set in the AT state starts (for example, the starting game of the set in the AT state, or when moving to the next set in the AT state), the promoted state lottery of the set (for example, This is done to determine either the promotion normal state or the promotion high certainty state.

The promotion status lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the promotion status lottery table shown in FIG. The status is to be determined. Note that the promotion state shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and the Lv. 5 It is also possible to provide three or more types of promotion states as promotion states that differ at least in part with respect to the degree of advantage in the promotion lottery.

<AT status lottery>
AT state lottery is, for example, when the set of AT state is started (for example, the start game of the set of AT state, or when moving to the next set of AT state), the AT state of the set (for example, (either the AP normal state or the AP high certainty state).

The AT state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT state lottery table shown in FIG. (high certainty state) is determined. In addition, in the AT transition type, "1st set" indicates the first set when the BB state where the so-called first hit ends and the AT state starts, and "BB" is the judge reward described later. In the lottery and judge final resurrection lottery, a reward of "weak BB" or "strong BB" is determined, indicating that the BB state has ended and the AT state has started. Further, the AT state shown in FIG. 44 (AP normal state or AP high probability state) is an example, and three or more types of AT states are provided as AT states that differ at least in part in terms of the degree of advantage in various lotteries related to AP granting. It is also possible.

<AP grant lottery>
As described above, the AP grant lottery during the AT state includes the AP grant lottery (when a bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when a strong bell is displayed), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when a self-help bell is displayed). During the AT state, the number of times the "bell" is displayed continuously (number of bells) is counted, and in the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), the AP to be granted is determined according to this number of bells. Ru. Note that this number of consecutive bells is counted not only by "bells in order of pressing", which will be described later, but also by "common bells" and "strong bells". In addition, if you win a certain rare combination (for example, "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Chance", or "Confirmed"), the count will not be cleared, and other numbers will not be cleared. If "bell" is not displayed in the end, the count is cleared.

For example, starting from a certain game during the AT state, if "Bell" is displayed in the first game by winning "Press Order Bell", "Common Bell", or "Strong Bell", the number of consecutive bells will be " 1”. If you win the "replay" in the second game (naturally, the "bell" is not displayed), the number of consecutive bells is cleared and becomes "0". Further, in the second game, when a "bell" is displayed by winning the "push order bell", "common bell", or "strong bell", the number of consecutive bells is incremented by 1 and becomes "2". Also, if you win "Watermelon" in the second game (although "Bell" is not displayed), since it is a specified rare role, the number of bells will not be cleared and will remain at "1", and then in the third game When a "bell" is displayed by winning the "press order bell", "common bell" or "strong bell", the number of consecutive bells is incremented by 1 and becomes "2".

AP award lottery (when bell is displayed) is, for example, at the end of each game, AP is awarded in response to the number of bells being "1" or more (that is, "bell" is displayed). done to decide. Note that this lottery is configured simply as a lottery to determine AP to be awarded when a "bell" is displayed in the game (it may not be awarded) without using the number of consecutive bells. You can also do that.

The AP award lottery (when the bell is displayed) is performed by referring to the "When the bell is displayed" table for the AP award lottery shown in FIG. The granted value (granted AP) is to be determined. Note that the granted AP shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and the value to be added can be set as appropriate. For example, as a guideline, since "+20" increases the judge level by one stage, other AP grant values such as "+40" or "+60" may be set.

AP award lottery (additional lottery at strong bell), for example, if the "bell" displayed in the game is in response to a "strong bell" lottery described later, the AP award lottery (additional lottery at strong bell) This is done to determine whether to additionally grant AP in addition to the lottery results (when displayed).

The AP grant lottery (strong bell additional lottery) is performed, for example, with reference to the strong bell additional lottery table shown in FIG. 44, and the AP grant value (granted AP) is determined with probability according to the current AT state. It has become something that will be done.

AP award lottery (additional lottery when self-help bell is displayed), for example, in the game, even though the navigation was not executed, "bell" is finally displayed (i.e., if the player answers correctly on his/her own) This is performed to determine whether to additionally award AP in addition to the lottery result of the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed) when the pressing order is selected.

The AP award lottery (additional lottery when self-help bell is displayed) is performed, for example, with reference to the additional lottery table when self-help bell is displayed shown in FIG. is to be determined.

<Lv. 5 promotion lottery>
Lv. The 5 promotion lottery is performed, for example, when a target winning combination is won during the AT state, to determine whether or not to set the judge level set in the set to "Lv. 5".

Lv. 5 promotion lottery, for example, the Lv.5 promotion lottery shown in FIG. 5 is performed with reference to the promotion lottery table, and "Lv. Either that ("winning") or that "Lv. 5" is not set ("non-winning") is determined. Note that even if the number of consecutive bells mentioned above is a predetermined value (for example, 5 or more), the lottery will be held (for example, with the same probability as when winning the "chance" lottery in the Lv. 5 promotion lottery table). It may be possible to do so.

<All navigation status lottery>
As mentioned above, the AT state is a gaming state that constitutes an "increasing section" in which information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified, but "all navigation" is not necessarily achieved in a game in which the player wins the "push order bell". It is configured as a gaming state that may not occur. The all-navigation state lottery is performed to determine whether or not a state in which "all navigation" can be performed during the AT state occurs over a certain period of time (for example, a period of 5 games as one set). .

It should be noted that one unit of "all navigation status" is 1 set of 5 games, and multiple units may be awarded at once. Furthermore, since one unit is managed based on the number of games, if you win the "push order bell" 5 times in 5 games, "all navigation" will be executed 5 times, but if you win the "push order bell" even once. If you do not win, "All Navi" will not be executed even once. In this way, the grant status of AP and medals is varied, thereby increasing the interest of the game. However, the management method for "all navigation states" is not limited to this. For example, it may be managed based on the number of times "all navigation" is executed. That is, when one set is given, the "all navigation state" may continue until "all navigation" is executed at least five times. Alternatively, the number of games may be managed without any concept of the number of sets, or the number of differential sheets may be used.

The all-navigation state lottery is performed by referring to the all-navigation-state lottery table shown in FIG. 45, for example, and the all-navigation state lottery is performed with a probability according to the current AT state and the internal winning combination determined in the game. Not giving the number of games (total number of Navi games) (“non-winning”), giving one set of all Navi games (“1 set”), giving two sets of total Navi games. (``2 sets''), granting the total number of navigation games for 3 sets (``3 sets''), granting the total number of navigation games for 5 sets (``5 sets''), premonitory state (2 games) ) to give the total number of Navi games for one set (``1 set + omen''), and to give the total number of Navi games for 2 sets after going through the omen state (2 games). (“2 sets + omen”), giving the total number of navigation games for 3 sets after going through the omen state (2 games) (“3 sets + omen”), passing through the omen state (2 games) After that, it is decided whether to give the total number of Navi games for 5 sets ("5 sets + omen").

Although the precursor state of all navigation states is defined as two predetermined games, the number of precursor games may be determined by lottery, or the precursor state may not be provided. In addition, the All Navi state lottery is held even during the stay in the All Navi state, and if you win, the number of All Navi games will be added and the All Navi state will be extended, but once the All Navi state is If the player wins the navigation state lottery and enters the all-navigation state, the all-navigation state lottery may not be performed until the number of all-navigation games becomes 0 and the all-navigation state ends.

Also, if the total number of Navi games for multiple sets is given during the AT state, the AT state basically does not end until the total number of Navi games is used up (the transition to the Judge state is waited). ), but in the AT state, if the total number of navigation games exceeds one set (30 games) of the AT state (for example, the total number of navigation games of 7 or more sets), the total number of navigation games is The transition from the AT state to the judge state of the set does not wait until all the number of Navi games have been played, but when the specified number of games (30 games) in the AT state of the set has been played (or the current It is determined that the AT state is always extended (for example, when the set of all navigation states being digested ends), the AT state is artificially ended, and in the judge state to which the transition is made thereafter, the AT state is always extended (for example, when the set of all navigation states that are being The AT state may be extended to the next set. Further, in this case, the unused number of navigation games granted in the set may be carried over to the next set and may be used.

Additionally, if the total number of navigation games is given during the AT state, the current remaining total number of navigation games (which may include the number of sets) is basically notified (or suggested) to the player. However, for example, if the total number of navigation games for multiple sets is given, in the relevant notification, the total number of navigation games for all the sets will be totaled and shown to the player (for example, if the number of navigation games for two sets is If the total number of navigation games for 1 minute is given, "10 games remaining" will be displayed, and the display will be decremented by 1 each time one game is played, etc.), or one set can be set. For each set, the total number of navigation games is shown to the player (for example, if the total number of navigation games for 2 sets is given, first, for the first set, "5 games remaining" is displayed, and when 1 game has been played) The display is subtracted by 1 each time the set is played, and when it is displayed as "0 games remaining," next, for the second set, "5 games remaining" is displayed again, and the same subtraction display is performed sequentially thereafter. ) can also be done. Note that such notification is not limited to a countdown type display, but may be a countup type display.

<AT Navi Lottery>
As mentioned above, in the AT state, "all navigation" is always executed when the full navigation state is in effect, but even when the full navigation state is not in the full navigation state, information on stop operations that are advantageous to the player is provided. It is now possible to be notified. AT Navi lottery is performed to determine whether to execute "all Navi" or partial Navi (for example, "2-choice Navi") when the total number of Navi games is not 1 or more.

The AT Navi lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT Navi lottery table shown in FIG. Depending on the probability, it is determined whether to execute "all navigation," partial navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation"), or no navigation. Note that in the AT Navi lottery, "4-choice Navi" is not determined, but it may be configured such that this can be determined.

<Judge Navi Lottery>
Judge Navi Lottery is a game in which the "Press Order Bell" (described later) is determined as an internal winning combination in the Judge state. This is done to determine whether or not to broadcast information (information indicating information). That is, in the above-mentioned extension decision, it is determined whether or not to improve the probability of successful extension.

When the judge level is "Lv. 1" to "Lv. 3", the Judge Navi lottery is performed by referring to the "Lv. 1 to Lv. 3" table of the Judge Navi lottery shown in FIG. 45, for example. Whether to execute "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation") with a probability depending on the current advantageous section mode and the number of judges. One of these is determined. It should be noted that although "no navigation" is not determined in "Lv. 1 to Lv. 3" of the navigation lottery during judge, it may be configured so that this can be determined.

Here, if we focus on the number of judgments, navigation that is advantageous on the ``second'' is more likely to be executed than the ``first'', and navigation that is advantageous on the ``third'' is more likely to be executed than on the ``second''. There is. In addition, as mentioned above, when the judge level is "Lv. 1", the decision to extend or not is made only once, so you can only receive the Navi lottery during judge with the probability specified in the "first time". . On the other hand, if the judge level is "Lv. 2", the decision on whether or not to extend the extension is made twice, so the probability of the extension being determined is determined by the "first time" lottery, and even if the extension is not successful here. Even in this case, the next time you will be able to receive the Judge Navi lottery with the stipulated probability of ``the second time''. In addition, if the judge level is "Lv. 3", the decision on whether or not to extend the extension will be made three times, so the probability of the extension being determined will be determined by the lottery during the "first time", and even if the extension is not successful here. Even if you do, you can receive the Judge Navi lottery next time with the probability specified for the ``2nd time'', and even if the extension is not successful here, the next time you will receive the lottery with the probability specified for the ``3rd time''. It is now possible to receive a Navi lottery while being a judge. In other words, changes in the judge level do not simply lead to changes in the number of times extension decisions are made, but also to changes in the degree of expectation for extension decisions.

Furthermore, when the judge level is "Lv. 0", the judging mid-navigation lottery is performed by referring to the "Lv. 0 time" table of the judge mid-navigation lottery shown in FIG. 45, for example, and the "all navigation" It is determined whether to execute the navigation or not to execute the navigation ("no navigation"). It should be noted that at "Lv. 0" in the judging Navi lottery, "4-choice Navi" and "2-choice Navi" are not determined, but it may be configured such that these can be determined.

<Judge reward lottery>
The judge reward lottery is performed to determine the mode of extension (the content of the benefit given to the player) when the result of the extension decision made in the judge state is a successful extension. Note that the manner of extension can be roughly divided into extension of the AT state to the next set and extension of the AT state to the next set via the BB state. "Continuation Type 1" to "Continuation Type 4" indicate the former, and "Weak BB" and "Strong BB" indicate the latter.

Further, "continuation type 1" to "continuation type 4" have different probabilities that the AP high probability state will be set in the AT state lottery described above. In other words, it is set as information that can change the degree of advantage in the next extended set. However, the manner in which the degree of advantage in the extended next set is varied is not limited to this. In other types of lottery performed in the AT state, the continuation type may be individually referenced, and the lottery may be performed based on the corresponding lottery value, thereby varying the degree of advantage in the next extended set. In addition, the degree of advantage between "weak BB" and "strong BB" can be set to have a difference as described above, but for example, in the AT state lottery described above, in the case of "weak BB" By making the probability that the AP high-certain state is set different for the case of "strong BB" and the case of "strong BB" (for example, the probability that the AT high-certain state is set is higher for the case of "strong BB"), the advantage can be The degree may be varied.

The judge reward lottery is based on the fact that the judge level is "Lv. 0" to "Lv. 3" and that "bell" is displayed in a game where "push order bell" (described later) is determined as an internal winning combination. If the decision result of the extension is successful, for example, the judgment is made by referring to the "Lv. 0 to Lv. 3 Judge Success" table of the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. 46, and the current advantageous section is determined. mode and the current judge level (for example, if the judge level at the time of transition to judge state is "Lv. 2" and the judge succeeds in the first judge, it will remain "Lv. 2", but If the second judgment fails and the second judgment succeeds, the result will be "Lv. 1").

In addition, in the judge reward lottery, if the judge level is "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", for example, the "When Lv.4/Lv.5 is determined" table for the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. This is done by reference, and one of the extension modes is determined with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the internal winning combination of the game.

In addition, in the judge reward lottery, the judge level is "Lv. 0" to "Lv. 3", and the decision result of the extension success is determined based on the fact that the predetermined rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination. In this case, for example, the judgment is performed by referring to the "When Lv. 0 to Lv. 3 winning combination is successful" table of the judge reward lottery shown in FIG. 46, and the internal winning combination of the game concerned and the current judge level ( (same as above), one of the extension modes is determined with a probability according to the above.

<Judge final resurrection lottery>
The judge final resurrection lottery is performed in the judge's final state, and is performed in order to provide an opportunity for a so-called one-shot reversal or pullback. Note that the manner of extension (the content of the benefit given to the player) that may be determined as a result of the lottery is the same as that in the judge reward lottery.

The judge final resurrection lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the judge final resurrection lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and one of the extension modes is determined with a probability according to the internal winning combination of the game.

In addition, in the judge final resurrection lottery table shown in FIG. 46, the internal winning combination of the game is a specific internal winning combination ("cherry", "watermelon", "chance", "strong bell", "guaranteed", etc.). However, this is just one example, and the AT status can be extended only if the internal winning combinations other than these specific internal winning combinations (for example, ``replay'' or ``push order'') are received. Even in the case of a normal hand (such as "Bell"), the AT state may be extended with an arbitrary probability. This also applies to other lotteries in which the lottery target combination is only a so-called rare combination in this embodiment.

<All navigation status lottery>
All Navi state lottery is given in the AT state of the next set of extensions according to the determined extension mode (reward) when the decision result of extension propriety decision in judge state is extension success. This is done to determine the total number of Navi games to be played. In addition, in the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, it is determined that the total number of navigation games will be awarded when a specific extension mode is determined, but if any extension mode is determined, Also, it may be determined whether or not to award the total number of Navi games (including not being awarded).

The all-navigation state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and the number of total navigation games is determined with a probability according to the determined extension mode (reward). .

As described above, when the set of AT states is started, the promoted state and the AT state (AP normal state or AP high certainty state) are determined, and during the AT state, the result of all Navi games awarded or the AT state is determined. Information on the stop operation is notified in accordance with the results of the Naka-navi lottery, and AP is awarded in consideration of these results. Then, if the cumulative value of AP becomes "80" or more, the judge level will be set to "Lv. 4", so the AT state will be extended (to the next set) in the judge state after the set is consumed. is confirmed. Further, even when the judge level is promoted to "Lv. 5", the extension of the AT state (to the next set) is confirmed in the judge state after the set is consumed. If the games of the set are played without the extension of the AT state being confirmed, and the total number of navigation games is also 0, the state shifts to the judge state. In the judge state, a decision is made as to whether or not the extension can be extended for the number of times (judge number) corresponding to the stage ("Lv. 0" to "Lv. 3") set according to the cumulative value of AP, and if the extension is successful, , the manner of extension is determined, and the AT state is extended in the determined manner. On the other hand, if the extension is not successful even after the number of judgments has been made, the AT state will be extended if the judge wins the final resurrection lottery. Ru. If it is not possible to win the judge's final resurrection lottery, the AT state ends without extension, the advantageous section also ends, and a transition is made to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the BB state, AT state, and judge state, when the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous section becomes 1800 or more (that is, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes ``1800'' or more), It shifts to the ending state that constitutes the above-mentioned "increased section" in which "all navigation" always occurs, and the ending state continues until the advantageous section ends due to limiter activation and shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. Since the ending state is a dedicated game state in which the limiter is activated, the "all navigation" will always occur in a game in which the "push order bell" described later is won, but the various drawings related to the above-mentioned gameplay will not be performed.

In addition, in the BB state and AT state, for example, when the net increase in the number of coins during the advantageous section becomes 1770 or more (that is, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "1770" or more), the ending state The player may be informed of the transition to the ending state in advance by transitioning to an ending preview state that foretells the transition to the ending state, and performing a dedicated ending preview performance.

Furthermore, the ending transition conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, when the number of AT state sets (AT set number) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 11 times) (that is, when the AT state continues for a predetermined period of time (for example, 360 games)), the transition to the ending state is made. You can also do this. Specifically, for example, when the number of AT sets reaches the 11th set, the transition to the ending state may be made when the 11th set is completed. In this case, the ending state may be entered upon completion of the 11th set, or the 11th set may be pseudo-transferred to the judge state, and in the judge state, , it is also possible to make sure that "all navigation" occurs in a game in which "push order bell", which will be described later, is determined as an internal winning combination, and to shift to the ending state when "bell" is displayed. Also, for example, the number of AT sets reaches the 11th set, the 11th set is completed, the state transitions to the judge state, and the AT state ends when it is decided to extend the AT state by determining whether or not to extend it in the judge state. It may be possible to make the transition to the state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the ending state are not limited to those described above. For example, the ending state ends when a predetermined fixed number of games (for example, an arbitrary number of games such as 101 games) is played after the ending state starts, and the state shifts to a non-advantageous period (standby state). You can do it like this. Further, as in the example described above, a plurality of conditions for transition to the ending state may be provided, and the transition to the ending state may be made according to the transition condition that is satisfied earliest among the plurality of transition conditions. Furthermore, the termination condition for the ending state may be set according to the transition condition that has been established. For example, in the ending state where the transition condition is satisfied in response to the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becoming 1800 or more sheets, limiter activation is set as the termination condition, and the transition condition is set in response to the number of AT sets becoming 11 times. In the ending state that is established, the above-mentioned fixed number of games played may be set as an ending condition.

<Example of game flow in AT state and judge state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of the flow of the game in the AT state and the judge state will be described. (a) and (b) of FIG. 41 are an example of a case where the transition from the AT state to the judge state results in an extension failure in the judge state, and (c) to (e) of FIG. This is an example of a case where the extension is successful in the judge state.

In addition, in (a) to (e) of FIG. 41, the "number of games progress" indicates the progress of the pure number of games played, and the "number of remaining games" indicates the number of games that can be stayed in the AT state and the judge state. This indicates that the number of games will decrease, the "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game, and the "display result" indicates the final result according to the player's stop operation. "AP" indicates the cumulative value of AP, and the gaming state indicates whether the corresponding game is in AT state or judge state. This indicates the status.

In (a) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been played from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" up to the 27th game. The subsequent flow will be explained with the 28th game as the first game (1G) in the "number of games". In the second game (2G), the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was awarded by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "push order bell", so the number of consecutive bells became "2", and the AP "3" was determined by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the playing period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv. 3" is set according to the current cumulative AP value "73", and the state will shift to judge from the next game. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", no decision is made whether or not to extend the winning combination, and the judge level remains at "Lv. 3". In addition, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination was "Push Order Bell", it was decided whether or not to extend the game, and "Bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). The extension failed and the number of judges was used up once, so the judge level has dropped to "Lv. 2". In addition, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning combination was "Bell in push order", it was decided whether or not to extend the game, and "Bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). The extension failed and the number of judges was used up once, so the judge level has dropped to "Lv.1".

In addition, in the 7th game (7G), since the internal winning combination was "Push Order Bell", a decision was made to extend or not, and in that game, "Bell" was not displayed (bell was spilled). The extension fails, the number of judges is used up once, the number of judges becomes 0, and the judge goes to the final state. no descent is performed). Then, in the 8th game (8G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", the judge's final resurrection lottery is not performed, and it is assumed that there will be no extension (extension failure).

In FIG. 41(b), for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been played from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" up to the 27th game. The subsequent flow will be explained with the 28th game as the first game (1G) in the "number of games". In the second game (2G), the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was awarded by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "push order bell", so the number of consecutive bells became "2", and the AP "3" was determined by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the playing period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv. 0" is set according to the current AP cumulative value "13", and the state shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", no determination is made as to whether or not it can be extended. In addition, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination was "Push Order Bell", it was decided whether or not to extend the game, and "Bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension fails and the judge level is originally "Lv. 0", the process moves directly to the final judge state. Then, in the sixth game (6G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", the judge final resurrection lottery is not performed, and it is assumed that there will be no extension (extension failure).

In (c) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been played from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" up to the 27th game. The subsequent flow will be explained with the 28th game as the first game (1G) in the "number of games". In the second game (2G), the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was awarded by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "push order bell", so the number of consecutive bells became "2", and the AP "3" was determined by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the playing period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv. 3" is set according to the current cumulative AP value "73", and the state will shift to judge from the next game. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", no decision is made whether or not to extend the winning combination, and the judge level remains at "Lv. 3". In addition, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination was "Push Order Bell", it was decided whether or not to extend the game, and "Bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). The extension failed and the number of judges was used up once, so the judge level has dropped to "Lv. 2".

In addition, in the 6th game (6G), the internal winning combination is "Press Order Bell", so a decision is made whether or not to extend the game, and since "Bell" is displayed in the game, the extension is successful and the judge reward lottery is decided. It is assumed that it has been determined that the AT state will be extended in accordance with the manner of extension that has been carried out and decided.

In (d) of FIG. 41, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been played from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" up to the 27th game. The subsequent flow will be explained with the 28th game as the first game (1G) in the "number of games". In the second game (2G), the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was awarded by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "bell" was displayed by winning the "push order bell", so the number of consecutive bells became "2", and the AP "3" was determined by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). is assumed to have been granted. Then, since the playing period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level "Lv. 0" is set according to the current AP cumulative value "13", and the state shifts to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is a "replay", no determination is made as to whether or not it can be extended. In addition, in the 5th game (5G), since the internal winning combination was "Push Order Bell", it was decided whether or not to extend the game, and "Bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled). Since the extension fails and the judge level is originally "Lv. 0", the process moves directly to the final judge state. However, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning hand is "Watermelon", the judge's final resurrection lottery is held, and the extension is ultimately successful, and the AT state is extended according to the determined extension method. It is assumed that this is confirmed.

In (e) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been played from the 1st to the 28th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "79" up to the 28th game. The subsequent flow will be explained with the 29th game as the first game (1G) in the "number of games". In the second game (2G), the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was awarded by the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that Then, since the playing period of the set ends in the second game (2G), the judge level "Lv. 4" is set according to the current AP cumulative value "80", and the state will shift to the judge state from the next game. ing.

In the third game (3G), the internal winning combination is "Replay", but since the judge level is "Lv. 4", the extension is successful and the judge reward lottery is performed, and the determined extension mode is applied. Therefore, it is assumed that the AT state will be extended.

<Gaming machine using AT state and judge state gameplay>
In the second gaming machine, by using the above-described gaming properties of the AT state and the judge state, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, there is an AT state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified, and a judge state in which it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the AT state. When a unit (for example, 30 games in one set) of games is played, the game is moved to the judge state, and if it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state, the AT state is moved to the next unit, and in the judge state, the AT state is moved to the next unit. If it is not decided to extend the AT status, it is possible to terminate the AT status for the unit; in the AT status, it is possible to grant “AP”; and in the judge status, at least the This gaming machine is capable of determining whether or not to extend the AT state by a number of times corresponding to the "AP" given in the AT state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the expected value of the granting probability of "AP" (the same applies to the above-mentioned "BP" and "CP") and the number of executions of the extension possibility determination is not limited to the above-mentioned ones. For example, the winning probability of "Press order bell", the display probability of "Bell" (for example, the correct number of choices for the pressing order and the range of pressed positions), the winning probability of "Common bell", the probability of winning for some navigations and all navigations. It is possible to comprehensively consider the probability of execution, etc., and set it appropriately within a range that does not make the gambling quality too high.

Also, for example, the conditions for awarding "AP" include that "Bell" is displayed, and in a game where "Press order Bell)" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed in the correct press order. If the stop operation is performed in an incorrect push order that is different from the correct push order, a symbol combination different from "bell" is displayed, and in the AT state, a "bell" is displayed. )" is determined as an internal winning combination, this gaming machine is capable of informing information on a stop operation (for example, 2-choice navigation or all navigation) that is advantageous for displaying "Bell".

Also, for example, in a game where "Press Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, if information on a stop operation that is advantageous for displaying "Bell" is to be announced, "All Navi" will notify all of the correct press orders. This is a gaming machine that sometimes performs "two-choice navigation" as a partial navigation where a part of the correct answer press order is notified.

For example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, it is necessary to use a gaming machine that can continue a state in which "all navigation" can be performed over multiple games in the AT state (for example, all navigation state). be.

Further, for example, the game machine is capable of determining a "common bell" in which a "bell" can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation as an internal winning combination.

Also, for example, in a game where "Push Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the AT state, if "Bell" can be displayed on your own without the navigation being executed, "AP" will be additionally awarded. This is a gaming machine that may be played.

Also, for example, the determination of whether or not to extend the AT state in the judge state is made in a game in which "Press Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, and if "Bell" is displayed in the game, it is decided to extend the AT state. This is a gaming machine that is capable of executing the navigation even when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the judge state.

Also, for example, when "AP" is granted in the AT state, it becomes possible to set a judge level (for example, Lv. 0 to Lv. This is a gaming machine that can determine whether or not to extend the game a number of times (number of times of judgment) according to the judge level.

Further, for example, in the judge state, if the set judge level is "Lv. 4" or higher, it is a gaming machine in which it is always decided to extend the AT state.

Further, for example, in the AT state, the gaming machine is capable of determining whether or not to set the set judge level to the highest "Lv. 5" regardless of the cumulative value of "AP".

Note that it is desirable that the judge level (which may be a cumulative value of AP) be suggested or notified in the AT state and the judge state. This may be realized, for example, by the above-mentioned gauge-like display, or by displaying the acquired rights corresponding to the number of times the judge has judged. Specifically, in the AT state, when the cumulative value of AP is 0 to 19, the number of rights is displayed as "0" or the expectation of extension is "white", and when the cumulative value of AP is 20 to 39, Displays the number of rights "1" or the expectation of extension "blue", and when the cumulative value of AP is between 40 and 59, displays the number of rights "2" or the expectation of extension "yellow" and the cumulative value of AP. is between 60 and 79, the number of rights is displayed as "3" or the expectation of extension is "green", and when the cumulative value of AP is 80 or more, the number of rights is "4 (extension confirmed)" or the expectation of extension is displayed. "Red" is displayed, Lv. 5 When a promotion lottery is won, the number of rights "MAX (extension confirmed)" or the extension expectation level "gold" may be displayed.

Further, for example, if the game state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be reported, and the player further has a BB state different from the AT state, and it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state. , is a gaming machine that can shift to the BB state and then shift the AT state to the next unit.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, when one unit of gaming is played in the AT state, it shifts to the judge state, and in the judge state, it is possible to extend the game by the number of times depending on the "AP" given during the AT state. Although it is assumed that the determination is made, the method of determining whether or not to extend the AT state is not limited to this. For example, the judge state is a state in which the player can stay for a plurality of games, but the judge state may be configured so that the player can stay in only one game. In this case, in one game, the number of extension decisions may be made in accordance with the "AP". Alternatively, without defining a unique gaming state called "judge state", in the final game of AT state (or, for example, between the remaining 3 games and 1 game of AT state), the number of times according to "AP" can be played. A decision may be made as to whether or not the period can be extended. In other words, it is only necessary that there be at least one game in which it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the AT state between the end of one unit of AT state (or just before the end) and the start of the next unit of AT state. Its specifications are not limited to those described above.

Also, for example, the number of times the extension decision can be made is changed depending on the "AP" given during the AT state, but the degree of advantage in the extension decision can be changed by varying factors other than the number of times. It's okay. For example, the winning probability of a successful extension may be configured to vary depending on the "AP" given during the AT state. As an example, regardless of whether the judge level is "Lv.0" to "Lv.3", the number of times the extension is decided is once.If the judge level is "Lv.0", there is a 5% chance that the extension will be successful. When the judge level is "Lv. 1", there is a 10% chance of winning the extension success, and when the judge level is "Lv. 2", there is a 25% chance of winning the extension success. When the judge level is "Lv. 3", it may be possible to win an extension success with a 50% probability (in this case, refer to the internal winning combination, and although there is a difference in the winning probability between internal winning combinations, The total probability may be set to the above-mentioned winning probability, or (although only the "determined winning combination" will win with a 100% probability), the winning probability may be set uniformly to the above-mentioned probability without referring to the internal winning combination. (It may also be a lottery.)

Furthermore, for example, the probability of "all navigation" occurring (resulting in successful extension) in a game where extension is determined is possible may be configured to differ depending on the "AP" given during the AT state. good. As an example, regardless of whether the judge level is "Lv. 0" to "Lv. 3", the number of times the extension is decided is once. When the judge level is "Lv. 1", there is a 10% probability that "all navigation" will occur, and when the judge level is "Lv. 2", there is a 25% probability that "all navigation" will occur. When the judge level is "Lv. 3", "all navigation" may occur with a 50% probability.

That is, for example, it is possible to have an AT state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be reported, and to make an extension decision that determines whether or not to extend the AT state. It can be executed in response to one unit of play (for example, 30 games in one set) being played in the AT state, and if it is decided to extend the AT state by determining whether or not to extend the AT state, the AT state can be changed to the next one. If the AT status is not decided to be extended based on the extension decision, the AT status can be terminated in that unit, and in the AT status, it is possible to be granted "AP". It is also possible to provide a gaming machine in which it is possible to determine whether extension is possible or not, at least in accordance with the "AP" given in the AT state of the unit.

[10-2. Design layout configuration of second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the symbol arrangement of the second gaming machine will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the second gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 47, in the second gaming machine, "Red 7", "Blue 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank", "Replay", Ten types of symbols "Bell 1" and "Bell 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 47 on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[10-3. Internal winning combination configuration of second gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the second gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55. 48 and 49 are diagrams showing an example of an internal lottery table of the second gaming machine. Further, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations of the second gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 51 to 53 are diagrams showing examples of symbol combination tables of the second gaming machine. Further, FIGS. 54 and 55 are diagrams showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the second gaming machine. That is, in the following, which symbol is selected depending on the type of internal winning combination drawn in the second gaming machine and the stop operation mode (i.e., batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. We will explain whether the combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed.

In the second gaming machine, in the internal lottery process described above (see FIG. 26), each internal winning combination shown in FIGS. In the 3-card bet state, the player wins with the probability (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. 49. The symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "Corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 50 to 53, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus role, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay role, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a minor role. , "HZR" indicates a combination of symbols related to a specific loss.

"F_2BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet between non-flags, while it is determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet. It is configured such that there is no case where it is determined as . In a game where "F_2BB" is won in a 2-bet state, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel (if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped), "BB01" will be displayed, While moving to the 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB), "BB01" is not displayed if the pressed position is x (when the stop operation is not performed at a timing that allows the corresponding symbol to be stopped). In addition, there is no case of "missing" between the 2BB flags, and since control is performed to stop symbol combinations related to replay roles and minor roles with priority over symbol combinations related to bonus roles, 2BB Even if it is between flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in a two-bet bet state. Further, since "F_2BB" is a bonus combination exclusively for the 2-card bet state, "BB01" will not be displayed in the 3-card bet state even if it is between the 2BB flags.

"F_3BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet between non-flags, while it is determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 2-card bet. It is configured such that there is no case where it is determined as . In a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-piece bet state, or in a game in which "F_3BB" wins in a 3-piece bet state between the 3BB flags, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BB02" is displayed, and 3BB is While moving to the state (bonus state based on 3BB), "BB02" is not displayed if the pressed position is × (when the stop operation is not performed at a timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped). Moreover, since "F_3BB" is a bonus combination exclusively for the 3-card bet state, "BB02" will not be displayed in the 2-card bet state even if it is between the 3BB flags.

"F_Bell A123", "F_Bell A132", "F_Bell A213", "F_Bell A231", "F_Bell A312A", "F_Bell A312B", "F_Bell A321A", and "F_Bell A321B" are: In a non-bonus state, it is configured such that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be explained as "push order bells" in the second gaming machine, but in order to distinguish them from those that will be explained later as "push order bells B", they will be referred to as "push order bells" here. It is described as "A".

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, "Push Order Bell A" has 6 options (any one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct pressing order). If it is determined as an internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation (any one of "FRU01" to "FRU08") is displayed, and if the bet is on 3 medals, 9 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is on 2 medals, 3 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct press order, and if the press order of the first stop operation is correct, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "single card combination" that is permitted to be displayed will be displayed. ” symbol combination (any one of “FRU14” to “FRU63”) is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. Also, if the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressed position will be ○ with a probability of 1/2 for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation (total probability of 1/4), If the pressed position is ○, the symbol combination of the "1-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressed position is ×, a missed medal will occur. No medals will be given out.

"F_Bell B123", "F_Bell B132", "F_Bell B213", "F_Bell B231", "F_Bell B312A", "F_Bell B312B", "F_Bell B321A", and "F_Bell B321B" are: In a non-bonus state, it is configured such that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be explained as "push order bell" in the second gaming machine, but will be explained as "push order bell B" here.

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, "Push Order Bell B" has 6 choices (any one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct pressing order). If it is determined as an internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, the "bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation is displayed, and if the player is in a 3-bet bet state, 9 medals will be paid out, and if 2 medals are in a bet state, 3 medals will be paid out.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct press order, and if the press order of the first stop operation is correct, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "single card combination" that is permitted to be displayed will be displayed. '' symbol combination is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. Also, if the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressed position will be ○ with a probability of 1/2 for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation (total probability of 1/4), If the pressed position is ○, the symbol combination of the "1-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressed position is ×, a missed medal will occur. No medals will be given out.

However, "push order bell B" is different from "push order bell A", and between 2BB flags and 3BB flags in a 2-card bet state, and between 3BB flags in a 3-card bet state, the push order of 3 choices is small. (In other words, if the first stop operation is correct, this is the correct pressing order), so if the first stop operation is correct, the timing of the stop operation will be changed. Regardless of the situation, the "Bell" symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed will be displayed, and if the bet is 3, 9 medals will be paid out, and if the bet is 2, 3 medals will be paid out. It becomes like this.

For example, when "Replay-Bell 1-Black BAR" of "FRU01" is displayed on the active line (middle-middle-top), "Bell" symbol combination is displayed on the cross-down line. (Bell 1 or Bell 2)” The symbols are displayed together. In other words, in the second gaming machine, "a 'bell' is displayed" does not necessarily mean a valid line, but includes the fact that the 'bell' symbols are displayed aligned on a line that the player can recognize. means. However, the active line is configured without making it an irregular line, and the symbol combination is configured so that the "Bell" symbols can be displayed all together on the effective line. It can also be configured so that it is included in ``. Moreover, such a configuration is the same for other symbols. Furthermore, "the symbols are aligned" does not mean that the same symbols are aligned on each reel, but also that the symbols are different but can be seen as the same by the player (or that the player can have such an idea). This shall also include.

“F_Common Bell A,” “F_Common Bell B,” and “F_Common Bell C” are configured so that in a non-bonus state, they may be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be described as "common bells" in the second gaming machine. If "Common Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, the "Bell" symbol combination that is allowed to be displayed will be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and if 3 medals are bet, 9 medals will be displayed. If the bet state is 2 medals, 3 medals are paid out.

“F_Cherry” is configured so that in a non-bonus state, it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that this is an internal winning combination described as "Cherry" in the second gaming machine. When "Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ on reel 3L, the "Cherry" symbol combination ("FRU11") will be displayed and two medals will be paid out regardless of the number of bets. Ru. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the symbol combination of "cherry spill" ("HZR05") is displayed. Note that since the symbol combination of "Cherry Spill" is a symbol combination related to "missing", no medals are paid out.

“F_Watermelon” is configured so that in a non-bonus state, it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that this is an internal winning combination described as "Watermelon" in the second gaming machine. When "Watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ on reel 3C, the symbol combination of "Watermelon" (either "FRU09" or "FRU10") will be displayed, regardless of the number of bets. Three medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is ×, the symbol combination of "Watermelon Spill" ("FRU12" or "FRU13") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out regardless of the number of bets. ).

“F_Replay A” is configured so that in a non-bonus state, it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that this is an internal winning combination described as a "replay" in the second gaming machine. When "Replay" is determined as an internal winning combination, a "Reply matching" symbol combination ("REP21") is displayed and a replay is awarded regardless of the mode of the stop operation.

“F_Replay B,” “F_Replay C,” and “F_Replay D” may be determined as internal winning combinations when a game is played with a 3-card bet in a non-bonus state. The system is configured such that when a game is played in a bet state, there is no possibility that the winning combination will be determined as an internal winning combination. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be described as "special" in the second gaming machine. When "Special" is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, "BAR matching" is permitted to be displayed (including combinations of "Black BAR" symbols and "White BAR" symbols) If the symbol combination (any symbol combination that is "BAR matching" among "REP25" to "REP34") is displayed, and the pressed position is ×, the symbol combination of other replay combinations that are permitted to be displayed (any one of "REP21" to "REP24" or a symbol combination among "REP25" to "REP34" that does not result in "BAR") is displayed, and a re-game is awarded.

"F_Chance A", "F_Chance B", "F_Chance C", "F_Chance D", and "F_Replay E" are played in a non-bonus state with a 3-card bet. The system is configured such that, on the other hand, when a game is played with two coins bet, it may not be determined as an internal winning combination. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be described as "chance moves" in the second gaming machine. If the "chance roll" is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the symbol combination of "chance rip" that is allowed to be displayed (Any one of "REP03" to "REP15") is displayed and if the stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", the pattern combination of "rep matching" ("REP21") is displayed. ) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

“F_Strong Bell A” and “F_Strong Bell B” may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a bet of 3 coins in a non-bonus state, but when a game is played with a bet of 2 coins, The system is configured such that if the winning combination is made, it will not be determined as an internal winning combination. Note that these are internal winning combinations that will be described as "strong bells" in the second gaming machine. If "Strong Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if a stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the "Bell matching reply" symbol that is allowed to be displayed If a combination (either "REP01" or "REP02") is displayed (that is, "bell" is displayed) and a stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", A "REP 21" symbol combination ("REP21") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

The "F_SP combination" may be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state when a game is played with a bet of 3 coins, while it is determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a bet of 2 coins. The structure is such that there is no case where it is determined as a role. Note that this is an internal winning combination described as a "determined combination" in the second gaming machine. If the “confirmed role” is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of “batting order 1” to “batting order 4”, the symbol combination of “SP Reply” that is permitted to be displayed (any one of "REP16" to "REP20") is displayed and if the stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", the pattern combination of "rep matching" ("REP21") is displayed. ) will be displayed and a replay will be granted.

"F_RB combination A" is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When "F_RB combination A" is determined as the internal winning combination, regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the "bell" symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. "F_RB combination B" is configured so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the symbol combination of the "1-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when a game is played in the recommended gaming state, there is basically no transition to the bonus state, so there is no chance of winning these internal winning combinations.

The internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the correspondence between internal winning combinations and symbol combinations shown in FIG. 50, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, and the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 The correspondence between the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. is just an example, and the specifications of the second gaming machine are not limited to the modes shown above.

[10-4. Instruction monitor configuration of second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, the instruction monitor configuration of the second gaming machine (ie, the notification mode of stop operation information) will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, regarding the notification of information on a stop operation, the determination of whether or not to execute it and the manner thereof is controlled by the main control circuit 100 side. Note that in the second gaming machine, the information on the stop operation is reported by the main side notification means and the sub side notification means, but the information on the stop operation may be notified by only one of them. You can also do it. However, in either case, the main control circuit 100 is the main control entity. In the second gaming machine, the content of the information on the stop operation notified may vary depending on the gaming state, etc., so this will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 56, when "Press Order Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, "CZ1 Final State", "CZ2 Normal State", "RB State", "AT State", and "Judge in Judge State" At level Lv. 1 to Lv. 3, it is determined whether to execute partial navigation, complete navigation, or no navigation according to the result of the navigation lottery. ``time'' is determined to be either full navigation or no navigation). Further, in the "BB state", "judge level Lv.4/Lv.5 of judge state", "ending state", and "1500th game in advantageous section", execution of all navigation is always determined. Furthermore, in any other gaming state, no navigation is always determined.

In addition, when partially executing the navigation in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, a plurality of choices may occur. For example, when executing "4-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_Bell A123" is determined as the internal winning combination, in the first stop operation, "left or middle" (instruction number " 10") or "left or right" (see instruction number "11" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). Therefore, when multiple options arise in this way, the distribution table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery, and the information on the stop operation is notified according to the determined instruction number. It is assumed that this will be implemented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "Common Bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, "CZ1 final state", "CZ2 normal state", "AT state", and "Judge level Lv.1 of judge state" ~Lv. 3 o'clock'', depending on the result of the navigation lottery, it is decided whether to execute some navigation, all navigation, or no navigation (at ``Judge level of judge state Lv. 0'', (It is decided whether to perform all navigation or no navigation). Furthermore, in any other gaming state, no navigation is always determined.

In addition, when executing partial navigation or full navigation in a game in which "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, a plurality of choices may occur. For example, when executing "4-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, in the first stop operation, "left or middle" (instruction number shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57 (see “10”), “left or right” (see instruction number “11” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), or “middle or right” (see instruction number “12” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). This means that the information may be broadcast. For example, when executing the "2-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, in the first stop operation, "left first stop" (indication information in FIG. 57 (see instruction number ``7'' shown in Figure 57), ``first stop in the middle'' (see instruction number ``8'' shown in the instruction information in Figure 57), or ``first stop on the right'' (see instruction number ``9'' in the instruction information in Figure 57). ”) may be broadcast.

For example, when executing "All Navigation" in a game in which "F_Common Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, "Left-Middle-Right" (see instruction number "1" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57) ), "Left--Right-Middle" (see instruction number "2" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), "Middle-Left-Right" (see instruction number "3" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), " ``Middle - Right - Left'' (see instruction number ``4'' shown in the instruction information in Figure 57), ``Right - Left - Middle'' (see instruction number ``5'' shown in the instruction information in Figure 57), or ``Right - Middle''. -Left” (see instruction number “6” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57) may be broadcast. Therefore, when multiple options arise in this way, the distribution table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery, and the information on the stop operation is notified according to the determined instruction number. It is assumed that this will be implemented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "Cherry", "Watermelon", or "Special" is determined as the internal winning combination, no navigation is always determined in any game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 56, when "Replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, "AT state", "Judge level of judge state Lv. 4/Lv. 5", "ending state", and " In the 1500th game in the advantageous section, execution of all navigation is always determined. Furthermore, in any other gaming state, no navigation is always determined. In this case, any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be determined, so as described above, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 57, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery. Information on the stop operation is announced in accordance with the determined instruction number.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 56, when a "chance win", "strong bell", or "definite win" is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined that AP will be awarded in the "AT state". In cases where the total number of navigation games is added, no navigation is determined, while in other cases, execution of all navigation is determined. In addition, in "judge level Lv. 4/Lv. 5 of judge state", "ending state", and "1500th game in advantageous section", execution of all navigation is always determined. Furthermore, in any other gaming state, no navigation is always determined. In this case, originally any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be determined, but "chance reply", "bell matching reply", or "SP reply" is displayed. In order to make it difficult for these winnings to be recognized, an allotment lottery is performed using the allotment table shown in FIG. 57 so that either instruction number "5" or "6" is determined. It becomes.

[10-5. Lock effect configuration of second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the lock effect configuration of the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, under the control of the main control circuit 100, it is possible to perform a lock effect in which the progress of the game is stopped or delayed for a certain period of time, and an example of this is shown in FIG. 58 also in the second gaming machine. Various lock effects (including those in which reel effects are performed) are to be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 58, "time (ms)" indicates the execution period of the corresponding lock effect, "occurrence trigger" indicates the trigger for starting the corresponding lock effect, and "operation explanation" indicates the execution period of the corresponding lock effect. It shows the content of the rock production. In addition, in the "occurrence trigger", "lever" indicates that a start operation was performed (that is, the start lever 7 was operated), and "3rd stop OFF" indicates that the third stop operation was performed. This indicates that the stop operation has been completed (that is, the stop button for the third stop operation has been operated and the pressing operation on the stop button has been released). Furthermore, in the "operation description", "game stop" indicates that the reel performance is not performed and the progress of the game is stopped (delayed/standby) for a period defined as "time (ms)".

For example, when the symbol combination of "Bell Rip" (the above-mentioned "Bell Match Rip"), "Chance Rip", or "SP Rip" is displayed, the lock effect of "Strong Rare Role Lock" (lock number "1") is displayed. executed.

Also, for example, when a start operation is performed in a game that has transitioned to the CZ1 final state, if the instruction number (see Figure 57) is "0" or one of "10" to "12", "CZ1 If the lock effect of "Medium Press Order Challenge 1" (lock number "2") is executed and the instruction number is one of "7" to "9", "CZ1 Middle Press Order Challenge 2" (lock number "3") is executed. ”) is executed, and if the instruction number is one of “1” to “6”, the lock effect of “CZ1 middle press order challenge 3” (lock number “4”) is executed.

Also, for example, in the CZ state, when the third stop operation is completed in a game in which the BB lottery is won (including the case where the transition to the BB state is confirmed by winning the "determined combination"), the "CZ hit lock" is activated. ” (lock number “5”) is executed.

Also, for example, when a start operation is performed in a start game in the RB state, one of the lock effects from "RB reel action 1" to "RB reel action 3" (lock numbers "6" to "8") is activated. executed. Note that which of these is to be executed may be determined by lottery, or for example, if three types of RB states are provided with different degrees of advantage for the player, Depending on the type of RB state, corresponding lock effects may be executed.

Further, for example, when a start operation is performed in a start game in the BB state (weak BB), a lock effect of "weak BB reel action" (lock number "9") is executed.

For example, when a start operation is performed in a starting game in the BB state (strong BB), "reel action 1 for strong BB" or "reel action 2 for strong BB" (lock number "10" or "11") One of the lock effects is executed. Note that which of these is to be executed may be determined by a lottery, or the ratio determined may be made to differ depending on the degree of advantage of the AT state before and after the decision, for example. For example, if the advantageous section mode is A, the lock number "11" is likely to be determined, and if it is other than the advantageous section mode A, the lock number "10" is easily determined, so that the advantageous section mode can be suggested. Good too.

Further, for example, when a start operation is performed in a start game in the BB state (freeze BB), a lock effect of "freeze reel action" (lock number "12") is executed.

Further, for example, when a start operation is performed in a start game in the special AT state, a lock effect of "special AT reel action" (lock number "13") is executed.

Further, for example, when transitioning to the ending state (for example, when a start operation is performed in a starting game in the ending state), a lock effect of "ED reel action" (lock number "14") is executed.

Also, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in a game where the RB state has ended, a "pseudo RB end lock" (lock number "15") is executed, and the third stop operation is completed in a game where the BB state has ended. Sometimes a "pseudo BB end lock" (lock number "16") is executed.

Also, for example, when you win the "push order bell" in a game while staying at judge level "Lv. 0" to "Lv. If the instruction number is one of "10" to "12", the lock effect of "Judge middle press order challenge 1" (lock number "17") is executed, and the instruction number is one of "7" to "9". If it is, the lock effect of "Judge middle press order challenge 2" (lock number "18") will be executed, and if the instruction number is any of "1" to "6", "Judge middle press order challenge 2" will be executed. The lock effect of ``Challenge 3'' (lock number ``19'') is executed, and if the instruction number is ``0'', the lock effect of ``Judge middle press order challenge 4'' (lock number ``20'') is executed. .

Also, for example, if it is determined that AP "3" or higher will be given in the AT state, and the instruction number is one of "1" to "6" (that is, all navigation will not be executed). If it has been determined), a lock effect of "all navigation bell short lock" (lock number "21") is executed. Note that even if the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, whether or not the lock effect is to be executed may be determined by lottery.

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in the game just before the start of the ending state, a lock effect of "Limiter Lock" (lock number "22") is executed. Note that the lock effect may be executed when the limiter is activated (that is, when the advantageous section is forcibly ended by the limiter activation).

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in a game in which the set in the AT state ends, a lock effect of "lock at end of AT" (lock number "23") is executed.

Further, for example, in the judge state, when the third stop operation is completed in a game in which it has been decided to extend the AT state, a lock effect of "Lock upon success of judge" (lock number "24") is executed.

Note that when executing various lock effects, the main control circuit 100 sends to the sub control circuit 200 a lock command that includes information that allows the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side) to recognize at least the type of lock effect to be executed. Send. Therefore, on the sub side, it is possible to perform a performance that is linked to the lock performance performed on the main side.

[10-6. Start effect executed at the start of the RB state of the second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, an example of the start effect executed at the start of the RB state in the second gaming machine will be described. The present embodiment is configured to be able to execute various main-side effects, various sub-side effects, or a combination of these effects, and the second gaming machine is also similar in this respect. The start effect executed at the start of the RB state will be explained.

In addition, in FIGS. 59 and 60, the left column shows an example of the flow of the main side effect (lock effect), and the right side column shows an example of the flow of the display mode in the effect display section as the sub side effect. This is what is shown. Further, FIG. 59 shows an example of the flow of performance when the player does not win the BB promotion lottery in the starting game in the RB state, and FIG. This figure shows an example of the flow of presentation in a case.

For example, "1G" in FIG. 59 is assumed to be staying in the CZ1 final state. As mentioned above, in the CZ1 final state, the gameplay is such that if a "bell" is displayed in the game, the game moves to a pseudo-bonus state (ranking up is not considered here). , a "bell" is displayed at the end of the game, a CZ1 reward lottery is carried out, the reward is determined to be "RB", and the state shifts to the RB state from the next game. In addition, at this time, the effect display section executes a confirmed effect (for example, a display of "bonus confirmed" in FIG. 59) indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state (in this case, the RB state) has been confirmed. It is said that Note that the confirmed performance may be one that definitively notifies the transition to the RB state, or one that definitively notifies the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, but the type (RB or BB) It is also possible to not notify the user until the date of the release.

Subsequently, in "2nd G" in FIG. 59, it is assumed that the player is staying in the starting game (first game) in the RB state. As mentioned above, in the starting game in the RB state, first, the reel effect in which the "white BAR" symbol arrangement is displayed (here, "reel action 1 for RB" with lock number "6") is executed, and then the game is started. is to be started. Also, at this time, although the progress of the game itself is stopped (delayed), in response to the start operation of the game, the internal winning combination is determined, the BB promotion lottery is performed, and the RB The ChuNavi lottery is being held. Therefore, in the game, it may be decided to shift to the BB state from the next game, and some navigation or all the navigation may be executed in the game.

In addition, in the effect display section, a start effect (for example, a display of ``RB start'' in FIG. ) is assumed to be executed. Thereafter, when the lock period related to the reel effect ends, each reel starts rotating normally. At this time, the performance display section executes a selection performance that allows the player to select the performance mode during the RB state from a plurality of performance modes (for example, the display of "Announcement type selection A B C" in FIG. 59). It is assumed that Moreover, at this time, in the performance display section, if a part of the navigation or all of the navigation is executed in the game, a notification regarding the navigation is executed.

Here, in the second gaming machine, the notification types for suggesting the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery in the RB state are notification type A which is a chance notification pattern, notification type B which is a complete notification pattern, and notification type B which is a complete notification pattern. A notification type C which is a notification pattern is set. Note that these are just examples, and some of these notification types may not be set, or other notification types that constitute notification patterns other than these may be set.

Announcement type A is a performance that suggests BB promotion (promotion suggestion performance) with a certain probability not only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a winning lottery, but also when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is not a winning lottery. By doing so, the performance becomes an announcement pattern that is a chance announcement. Therefore, the frequency with which this effect is performed will be higher (at least compared to notification type B), which has the advantage of increasing expectations by increasing the number of executions of the effect. It is an announcement type that has the disadvantage that the reliability of the performance (the probability of actually winning if it is performed) is low because it is also executed. Players who perceive these points as advantages are likely to select this notification type.

Furthermore, the notification type B is a notification pattern in which the promotion suggestion performance is executed only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a win, so that the performance becomes a confirmed notification. Therefore, since so-called false announcements are not executed, there is an advantage that the reliability of the performance is high, but since the frequency with which the performance is executed is low (at least compared to notification type A), the execution of the performance is This is an announcement type that has the disadvantage of being less frequent and unable to raise expectations in this respect. Players who perceive these points as advantages are likely to select this notification type.

Further, the notification type C is a notification pattern in which the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is not announced depending on the execution of the promotion suggestion performance. As mentioned above or as explained below, if you win the BB promotion lottery in the RB state (when it is decided to move to the BB state), when the next game starts (starting game in the BB state), , "Red 7" or "Blue 7" symbols are displayed on the reel (see lock numbers "9" to "12" in FIG. 58). Therefore, the notification type is a notification pattern in which the transition to the BB state is announced for the first time upon execution of this reel effect. Therefore, an announcement is made as if the reel performance has suddenly been executed and the state has shifted to the BB state, so while there is an advantage in that such an announcement can increase interest, the number of executions of the performance itself is As with type B, the number of participants decreases, so this is an announcement type that has the disadvantage of not being able to raise expectations in this respect. Players who perceive these points as advantages are likely to select this notification type.

In addition, notification types A to C notify the player of promotion to BB status using different notification patterns, but in all of them, "Red 7" or "Blue" is announced in the next game after winning the BB promotion lottery. The control on the main side is common in that a reel performance in which "7" is aligned occurs. Therefore, while saving the control burden and data amount on the main side, it is possible to realize a variety of announcements by combining announcement patterns and reel effects.

After executing the selection effect, when the player operates the effect button (selection operation) during the game ("2G" in FIG. 59) and determines the desired notification type, In the effect display section, a result effect (the display of "A" after the selection operation in FIG. 59) indicating the result of the player's selection of the notification type is executed. In addition, after executing the selection effect, if the player performs up to the third stop operation without performing a selection operation (that is, if all reels have stopped), a predetermined notification type ( Here, for example, it is assumed that the notification type A) is automatically determined. In this case as well, the above-mentioned result effect is executed.

Note that the performance based on the notification type selected by the player is executed from the next game onward, and is not executed in the game concerned (although it is also possible to configure it so that it is executed from the game concerned). In other words, the above series of performances in the game can be said to be an introduction performance when the RB state is started. Furthermore, even if this is done, in the starting game in the RB state, the BB promotion lottery and the RB mid-navi lottery are performed like other games, so there is no disadvantage to the player.

However, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned introduction effect is executed in the starting game in the RB state, and the effect based on the selected notification type is executed from the next game onward. In the case of winning the BB promotion lottery, it is thought that there is room to devise the timing and manner in which this should be indicated or announced. An example of such a device will be described in FIG. 60, which will be described later.

In FIG. 60, the flow up to the start of normal rotation of "1st G" and "2nd G" is the same as that in FIG. 59. However, in FIG. 60, it is assumed that the transition to the BB state has been determined in the BB promotion lottery in the "2nd G".

In this case, in FIG. 60, after executing the selection effect, the player operates the effect button (selection operation) during the game ("2G" in FIG. 60), and the desired notification type is selected. Once determined, the performance display section displays a specific performance that is different from the above-mentioned result performance (indicated by "?
? ? ” display) is executed. That is, when the player selects a notification type, normally a selection performance would be executed according to the selection result, but instead a specific performance is executed. Similarly, after the selection effect is executed, if the player performs up to the third stop operation without any selection operation (that is, when all reels are stopped), the above result effect will be applied. Instead, a specific performance is executed. However, if the player performs up to the third stop operation without performing a selection operation, the result performance may be performed as usual instead of the specific performance, and an incentive for the selection operation may be provided.

Note that the specific performance may be, for example, as shown in FIG. 60, any performance that at least suggests or informs that the situation is different from normal; for example, it may be a promotion suggestion performance as a chance announcement mentioned above. It may be the same or at least a part of the same performance, or it may be the same or at least a part of the promotion suggestion performance as the confirmation announcement described above. Furthermore, for example, it may be a so-called premium performance that is not normally performed. Also, for example, when notification type A or notification type B is selected, a specific effect is executed by performing a result effect of a different effect mode from the selected effect mode, such as intentionally executing a result effect of notice type C. It is also possible to do so.

Then, when the "2nd G" game ends (not shown) and the "3rd G" game starts as shown in FIG. 60, the game is in the BB state (here, "weak BB" ), so first, the reel effect in which the "Red 7" pattern alignment is displayed (in this case, the "Low BB reel action" with lock number "9") is executed, and then the game starts. It will start. In addition, in the effect display section, a start effect (for example, a display of ``BB start'' in FIG. ) is assumed to be executed.

As mentioned above, the notification type C is a notification pattern in which the promotion suggestion performance is not executed. Therefore, in FIG. In such a case, the result effect corresponding to the selection result may be executed as is, and the transition to the BB state may be indicated to the player by suddenly executing the reel effect in the next game.

<Game machine that uses the gameplay of RB state (and its production specifications)>
In the second gaming machine, by using the above-described gameplay of the RB state (and its production specifications), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, there is an RB state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and in the RB state, when the next game after the game in which the transition condition is satisfied is started, the "white BAR" symbol arrangement stops. It is started after the displayed reel performance (for example, a locked medium white BAR complete performance) is executed, and the performance display section displays the performance mode (for example, announcement type) during the RB state in the starting game in the RB state. ) can be executed to make the player select from a plurality of presentation modes, and after executing the selection presentation, when one presentation mode is selected by the player's presentation operation (for example, selection operation), This is a gaming machine that executes a performance according to a selected performance mode during an RB state.

Note that in the second gaming machine, the state in which the performance mode can be selected is described as the RB state, but such a state is not limited to the RB state. For example, in the CZ1 state, a CZ1 BB lottery is also held, and if you win, you will move to the BB state from the next game, so you can select the performance mode from the CZ1 state. It may be configured as a state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the performance execution means for executing the selection performance, the result performance described later, and the specific performance is described as a performance display section, but as long as the player can recognize these performances, other It is also possible to use the effect execution means.

Furthermore, in the second gaming machine, the performance mode that can be selected by the player is described as a notification type, but such a performance mode is not limited to the notification type. For example, when a player selects a character, background, or song (or a combination of these), the player can select the presentation mode in such a way that the presentation using the selected character, background, or song is executed in the RB state. Good too.

In addition, the selection operation for selecting the performance mode may be any game operation that reflects the player's intention, and is not limited to the performance operation on the performance button, for example, the time during which the start lever 7 is tilted, etc. , the stop button 8L, 8C, 8R may be pressed during any one of the stop operations.

For example, when one performance mode is selected by the player's performance operation after executing the selected performance, the performance display section executes a result performance indicating the selection result of the performance mode in the game, and This is a gaming machine that executes a performance according to a performance mode selected from the next game.

For example, it is possible to decide whether or not to give a benefit (for example, transition to the BB state) during the RB state, and this is the same in the starting game in the RB state, and the performance display section In the starting game, when it is decided to give a benefit, if one performance mode is selected by the player's performance operation after executing the selection performance, a specific performance different from the result performance in the game (e.g. This is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a promotion suggestion performance).

Note that, in the second gaming machine, the benefit given during the RB state is described as a transition to the BB state, but such a benefit is not limited to the transition to the BB state. For example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the total number of Navi games will be awarded during the RB state, and this may be configured as the above-mentioned benefit. Further, for example, it may be possible to decide whether to transition to the AT state during the RB state, and this may be configured as the above-mentioned benefit. Furthermore, for example, the gaming period of the RB state may be extended (additional number of games are given, number of sets are added, etc.) during the RB state, and this may be constituted as the above-mentioned benefit. That is, in the starting game in the RB state, the benefit that allows a specific performance to be executed instead of the result performance can be various benefits.

Also, for example, in the starting game in the RB state, after a selection effect is executed, if all the reels are stopped without selecting one effect mode due to the player's effect operation, a benefit will be given in the game. If it is decided not to do so, one predetermined presentation mode is determined and a result presentation corresponding to this is executed, while if it is decided that a benefit will be given in the game, is a gaming machine in which a specific performance is executed.

Further, for example, if it is decided to provide a benefit in a game subsequent to the starting game in the RB state, the gaming machine is capable of executing a specific performance without executing a selection performance.

Further, for example, the plurality of performance modes that can be selected by the player include, for example, a notification type B that is a complete notification pattern and a notification type C that is a reel notification pattern, and the notification type B is the start of the RB state. In the game after the next game, a specific performance is always executed when it is decided to give a benefit, and notification type C is a performance mode in which a specific performance is always executed in the game after the starting game in the RB state. This gaming machine has a performance mode in which a specific performance is not executed even if it is decided to provide a benefit.

In addition, for example, there is a BB state, which is a gaming state different from the RB state, in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and in the BB state, the next game after the game for which the transition condition is satisfied is started. This starts after a reel performance in which a set of "Red 7" symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, a red 7 set display during lock) is executed, and it is decided to give a benefit in the RB state. In this case, the gaming machine satisfies the conditions for transition to the BB state.

Also, for example, there is an AT state, which is a gaming state different from the RB state and the BB state, in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and the RB state may not shift to the AT state after the end of the AT state. A gaming machine is in a certain gaming state, and the BB state is a gaming state that always transitions to the AT state after the end of the BB state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, in principle, the RB state does not shift to the AT state after the end of the RB state unless it is promoted to the BB state, but as mentioned above, the AT lottery is performed during the RB state, It may be configured such that if the player wins, the state may shift to the AT state after the RB state ends. In addition, in principle, the BB state always transitions to the AT state after the end of the BB state, but an AT lottery is also held during the BB state, and if the lottery is won, the system transitions to the AT state after the BB state ends. However, it may be configured such that if the winning state is not won, the state may not be shifted to the AT state after the BB state ends. However, in order to create a difference in the degree of advantage between the RB state and the BB state, it is desirable that the AT lottery winning probability in the BB state be higher than the AT lottery winning probability in the RB state.

In addition, for example, in a game where "Bell in push order" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "Bell" will be displayed, which will pay out 9 medals, and if the correct answer is If the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order that is different from the pressing order, the "bell" will not be displayed, and in the RB state, the correct pressing order is The BB state is a gaming state in which notification may not be made, and the BB state is a gaming state in which the correct pressing order is always notified in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination.

Also, for example, if the specified end conditions (for example, 21 games have been played) are met without the transition conditions to the BB state being satisfied in the RB state, the amount of medals awarded during the RB state is If the amount is less than the amount (for example, 0 coins), the gaming machine shifts to the BB state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned specific amount is set to "0 coins", but this count may be determined based on the actual payout amount, but it is determined according to predetermined count conditions. It may be counted and the determination may be made based on the count result. For example, if the determination is made based on the actual payout amount, if the payout amount during the RB state is arbitrarily reduced by intentionally performing a different stop operation even when the navigation is executed, There may also be cases where the BB state is acquired in an unintended manner. Therefore, we changed the counting conditions to count the actual payout amount (9 coins or 1 coin or 0 coins) in the case of no navigation or partial navigation when the "push order bell" is won, and to count the actual payout amount (9 coins or 1 coin or 0 coins) when the "push order bell" is won and all the navigation In this case, "9 pieces" will be counted (regardless of the actual amount paid out), if "Watermelon" is won, "3 pieces" will be counted (regardless of the actual amount paid out), and if "Cherry" is won, "3 pieces" will be counted (regardless of the actual amount paid out). It may be configured to count "2 coins" (regardless of the actual payout amount).

In addition, if the conditions for transition to the BB state are not met in the RB state and the specified end conditions are met, the transition to the BB state as a relief is only possible if all navigation has never been executed in the RB state, or It may also be possible that a condition is satisfied, such as when all the navigations are executed less than a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) in the RB state.

Further, for example, if the conditions for transition to the BB state are satisfied in the RB state, the RB state ends even before the specified termination conditions for the RB state are met, and the gaming machine shifts to the BB state from the next game.

[10-7. Other ideas for the second gaming machine]
The second gaming machine is not limited to what has been described above, and further improvements can be made to increase the interest of the game. One such example will be described below.

(Press order history display)
As mentioned above, in the second gaming machine, the actual result depends on whether "bell" was displayed in a game in which "push order bell" was determined as an internal winning combination (that is, whether the stop operation was performed in the correct press order). Not only does the number of medals awarded to the player vary, but the degree of advantage regarding the transition (granting) or continuation (extension) of an advantageous state for the player also varies. Therefore, when the "pushing order bell" is won, which pressing order is the correct answer is information of great interest to the player.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, it is possible to provide the player with information regarding the correct pressing order of the "pressing order bell". In other words, if the player is provided with information regarding the order of correct presses for a certain period in the past at any time desired by the player, it becomes possible to transition (grant) or continue (extend) a state advantageous to the player. In games where it is decided whether or not these will be played, the player can select his/her own push order using the information as a clue, so it is possible to provide fun and strategy in guessing the correct push order. This makes it possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

As a specific example, an example of the push order history display in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 shows the display mode in the main effect display section 21. As the press order history display, the first history display (upper display in FIG. 61) showing the cumulative number of correct press orders for today, and the last six 61 shows a second history display (lower right display in FIG. 61) showing the contents of the correct press order.

Note that both the first history display and the second history display may be displayed on the main effect display section 21, or both may be displayed on the sub effect display section 22. , one may be displayed on the main effect display section 21 and the other may be displayed on the sub effect display section 22. Furthermore, these may be displayed at the same time, or only one of them may be selected and displayed by the player's selection operation (or only one of them may be displayed). However, the other may be displayed by the player's switching operation).

In addition, regardless of whether the game is being played or not (for example, even while the reels are rotating), a predetermined operation (for example, any It may be displayed when a button is pressed and held for 3 seconds or more, or it may be displayed when the press order history is particularly necessary (for example, CZ1 final state or judge state). , or when a game in which the "push order bell" won in the CZ2 normal state or AT state is started), it may be displayed automatically without any operation by the player. Further, it may be possible to set whether or not the press order history display is automatically displayed in the user menu (or by performing the above-mentioned predetermined operation).

In addition, the first history display shows the cumulative number of correct press orders for today, but specifically, the "push order bell" is displayed from the time the pachislot machine 1 is turned on until it is turned off. A device that counts and stores the correct pressing order (in other words, the type of pressing order bells) of the winning game (for example, the addition is sequentially updated until the power is cleared when the power is turned off), and displays this counting result. (In other words, it displays historical information regarding the "push order bell" for each business day of the game parlor).

The cumulative number of correct presses is counted by a counter provided on the main side (in other words, it is managed on the main side), and this count result is sent to the sub side so that the sub side can check the press order. The history may be displayed, or it may be counted by a counter provided on the sub side (that is, it is managed on the sub side), and regardless of which gaming state the main side may be able to display the sub side. The sub-side may be able to display the push order history by transmitting at least information regarding the correct push order in the game in which the player wins the "push order bell." In the latter case, information regarding the correct pressing order may be sent to the sub side as the above-mentioned "instruction number", or information regarding the correct pressing order may be sent to the sub side as information different from the "instruction number". may be sent to. However, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned "instruction number" does not necessarily indicate the correct pressing order in the normal state where navigation is not executed or in the AT state where "2-choice navigation" or "4-choice navigation" is executed. In addition, even in a game where the correct press order is not reported, if the correct press order is sent to the sub side every time the game starts, that information may be incorrect (see Figures 56 and 57). There is also an increased risk of fraudulent acts such as being read by someone else. Therefore, for example, it is desirable that the information regarding the correct pressing order be configured as different information from the above-mentioned "instruction number" and as information included in the winning activation command transmitted at the end of the game.

In addition, the second history display is supposed to show the contents of the last six correct answer presses, but specifically, it can be displayed during the most recent predetermined gaming period (6 times as an example, but any other number of times). The contents of the correct pressing order (in other words, the type of pressing order bell) of the game that won the "pressing order bell" (the number of games can be set, for example, 30 games, etc.) (for example, the stored contents are updated sequentially in FIFO format until cleared when the power is turned off) and display this content (i.e., the history regarding the "press order bell" is displayed for each predetermined gaming period). information). Note that, similar to the above, the information may be managed on the main side or may be managed on the sub side.

Further, the second history display may be displayed in such a manner that it is possible to recognize whether or not the player actually performed the stop operation in the correct pressing order. For example, in Figure 61, the history for "1st time ago", "4th time ago", and "5th time ago" are all "middle left/right", but "4th time ago" can be stopped in the correct order. If the stop operation was not performed in the correct pressing order "1st time ago" and "5th time ago" (the stop operation was performed in the incorrect pressing order), the "middle left and right" of "4th time ago" The display mode may be different from the display mode of "1st time ago" and "5th time ago". For example, the "center left and right" of "4 times ago" are displayed in large letters, while the "center left and right" of "1 time ago" and "5 times ago" are displayed in small letters. Further, for example, the "middle left and right" of "4 times ago" are displayed in yellow, while the "center left and right" of "1 time ago" and "5 times ago" are displayed in gray. In this way, the player will be able to know information including whether or not he or she was actually able to perform the stop operation in the correct pressing order. Furthermore, the order of presses in which the stop operation was actually performed (regardless of whether the answer is correct or incorrect) may be displayed relative to the correct press order shown in each.

Further, in the second history display, it may be displayed in a display manner such that it is possible to recognize whether or not the navigation has been executed (and the contents of the executed navigation). For example, in FIG. 61, "all navigation" is executed from "1 time ago" to "3 times ago", "no navigation" is executed "4 times ago", and "4 times ago" is executed "4 times ago". If the "select navigation" is being executed and the "two-choice navigation" is being executed "six times ago", for example, if the "first time ago" history is set to "middle left/right (all navigation)" and the "two times" history is The history of "Previous" is set to "Right, left, center (all navigation)", the history of "3 times ago" is set to "Right, left, middle (all navigation)", and the history of "4 times ago" is set to "Center, left, right (no navigation)". , the history of "5 times ago" may be displayed as "middle left/right (4-choice navigation)" and the history of "6 times ago" may be displayed as "left-center-right (2-choice navigation)". In this way, the player will be able to know information including whether or not the navigation was being executed.

Note that the first history display and the second history display are merely examples of press order history displays. Only one of these may be displayed, or a press order history display stored according to another condition may be displayed together with or in place of these.

Here, an example of gameplay using the push order history display will be described. For example, suppose that in the judge state, you win the "push order bell", a "two-choice navigation" occurs, and the "first stop" is navigated, and at this time, the first history display and the second history display Suppose that is displayed. In this case, in the second history display shown in FIG. 61, there are many "middle left and right" histories. Therefore, a certain player predicts that the next game will be "middle right/left", and another player predicts that the next game will be "middle right/left". Further, in this case, for example, it is assumed that there are many histories of "middle left and right" in the first history display as well. In this case, the former can perform a stop operation with the expectation that their guess is correct, and the latter can perform a stop operation with the hope that the probability will converge soon. That is, by displaying the push order history in this manner, it is possible to dramatically improve the enjoyment of predictions by the player in such situations.

As described above, in the second gaming machine, for example, in a game where the player wins the "push order bell", if a stop operation is performed in the correct press order, the "bell" is displayed, while the correct press order is displayed. If the stop operation is performed in a different incorrect pressing order, a symbol combination different from the "bell" will be displayed, and in a specific situation (for example, in a judge state), in a game where the "pressing order bell" is won, If the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, a specific benefit (for example, extension of the AT state) may be granted, and the history regarding the correct pressing order when the "pushing order bell" is won according to predetermined conditions. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can store information and display the history information according to specific conditions.

(Special effect for avoiding bar alignment)
As described above, the second gaming machine is provided with internal winning combinations ("F_Replay B", "F_Replay C", and "F_Replay D") which will be described as "special". And, for this "special", if the pressing position is appropriate when pressed in order (first stop on the left), "white BAR" symbols will be displayed in a line on a predetermined line ("BAR 2 complete" in Figure 55), At least when the button is pressed backward (first stop on the right) and the pressed position is appropriate, the "black BAR" symbols are displayed in a line on a predetermined line ("1 set of BARs" in FIG. 55).

For example, in the RB state, when notification pattern A or B is selected, if you win the BB promotion lottery due to winning the "special", you will be able to aim for the "white BAR" by pressing in order. If the "white BAR" symbols are aligned, the promotion to BB will be confirmed (in the case of announcement pattern A, if you win another role where the "white BAR" symbols are not aligned, Even if the player does not win the BB promotion lottery, the announcement performance may occur as a fake performance).

For example, although the description was omitted above, in the BB state, the number of continuous sets in the AT state (synonymous with the above-mentioned "right to execute the AT state") is added (in short, the number of sets for which the extension is confirmed) is added. In the set number addition lottery, it is possible to increase the number of sets with a predetermined probability at least due to winning a "special" prize. If you win the set number addition lottery due to winning the "Special", an announcement will occur that will make you aim for the "Black BAR" symbol by pressing the reverse button, and if the "Black BAR" symbol is aligned. , the additional number of sets will be confirmed (in addition, even if you win a different role in which the "Black BAR" symbols do not match and you do not win the additional lottery for the number of sets, the announcement performance will be false). (It may occur as a performance.)

In this way, the "special" functions as a so-called chance role at least in the RB state and the BB state, and the mode of the announcement performance (including whether or not to execute the announcement performance) can be made different. This makes it possible to make the RB state and the BB state function as if they were different chance hands, even though they are the same internal winning combination.

However, for example, there are game states such as the normal state in which such a role does not function as a chance role (or you do not want it to function), but "special" naturally has internal It can be determined as a winning combination (for example, see FIG. 49), and also when you win "special" in the RB state but do not win the BB promotion lottery, or when you win "special" in the BB state but set it. There may be cases where you don't win the number addition lottery, but even in such a case, if you aim for the "white BAR" by pushing forward or aim for the "black BAR" by pushing backwards, you can get a "white BAR" symbol or a "black BAR". The symbols will be displayed all together, and the player will be confused.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, when "special" is determined as an internal winning combination under such a situation, the special It is possible to devise ways to ensure that the performance is executed. That is, when the special effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a possibility of winning a "cherry" or "watermelon".

Now, if we pay attention to the symbol arrangement on reel 3L (see Figure 47), if we want to display the "cherry" symbol on reel 3L, we usually aim for the "black BAR" symbol, so the "white BAR" symbol is not displayed, and if you want to display the "white BAR" symbol, you will aim near the "white BAR" symbol, so the "cherry" symbol will not be displayed (because the maximum number of pieces to slide is 4 symbols). Furthermore, in the second gaming machine, "cherry" is configured as a winning combination that can be missed (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when a special effect is executed, the player will perform a stop operation aiming at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol in order to avoid missing the "cherry", and it is also possible that the It's also a great way to play. That is, when the player performs the stop operation by pressing sequentially, if the player tries to play the game in an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special effect, it is possible to avoid ending up with all the "white BAR" symbols.

Also, if you pay attention to the symbol arrangement on reel 3C (see Figure 47), when you want to display the "watermelon" symbol on reel 3C, usually special symbols other than the "black BAR" symbol ("red 7" symbol, Since you aim near the "Blue 7" symbol, "White BAR" symbol), the "Black BAR" symbol will not be displayed. If you want to display the "Black BAR" symbol, you will aim near the "Black BAR" symbol. , the "watermelon" symbol is not displayed (because the maximum number of pieces to slide is 4 symbols). Furthermore, in the second gaming machine, "Watermelon" is configured as a winning combination that can be missed (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when a special effect is executed, the player will perform a stop operation aiming at the vicinity of the special symbol other than the "black BAR" symbol in order to avoid missing the "watermelon", and is actually the proper way to play. In other words, when the player performs a stop operation other than pressing sequentially, if the player tries to play the game in an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special effect, it is possible to avoid ending up with all the "black BAR" symbols.

In addition, when the player performs a stop operation by reverse pressing, and if the player is aiming at the vicinity of the "Black BAR" symbol on reel 3R, the stop display mode of the first stop (in short, the "Black BAR" symbol It is possible to determine whether or not you have won a ``watermelon'' by whether the ``watermelon'' symbol is displayed or the ``watermelon'' symbol is displayed.On the other hand, it is possible to determine whether you have won a ``chance'' or ``strong bell''. (See Fig. 55. At the first stop on the right, only "Reply" is stopped and displayed). In other words, if you play the game by pressing backwards, there is a high possibility that you will not be able to determine that a good opportunity has arrived. Therefore, if you try to play a game using an appropriate gaming method, the possibility that the game will be played by pushing backwards will inevitably decrease, and as a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of all "black BAR" symbols. However, it is also possible to apply the symbol arrangement like the above-mentioned reel 3C to the reel 3R so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of "black BAR" symbols.

(1st special performance)
As mentioned above, in the second gaming machine, the BB state that starts when the reel performance with the "Blue 7" symbols is executed is the strong BB state, which is considered to have a higher degree of advantage for the player than the weak BB state. It has become. Therefore, during the strong BB state, the first special performance, which is different from the normal performance, is performed to suggest that the player has a high degree of advantage.

The first special performance is, for example, a so-called "episodic performance" (or "story performance", etc.), in which a series of stories (using video and audio) is played over multiple games. Can be configured. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of such performances, each having at least a portion of the contents (episodes) different from each other, and in this way it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored.

In the second gaming machine, the first special effect to be executed can be determined in accordance with the situation immediately before the transition to the strong BB state. can be done.

In the second gaming machine, it is possible to transition to the strong BB state from any of the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, RB state, or AT state (via the judge state). When transitioning to the BB state, a first special performance is determined in which episodes related to characters that mainly appear in the CZ1 state are played, and when transitioning from the CZ2 state to the strong BB state, episodes related to characters that mainly appear in the CZ2 state are determined. When the first special performance is determined and the RB state is shifted to the strong BB state, the first special performance in which the episode related to the character that mainly appears in the RB state is played can be determined.

In addition, for example, in the AT state, a different enemy character can appear for each set, and in the judge state after the set is used up, a battle performance with the enemy character that has appeared is performed, and the extension is successful. If the extension fails, the result of the battle performance will be shown as a battle victory, and if the extension fails, the result of the battle performance will be shown as a battle defeat. When the transition occurs, a first special performance in which an episode related to the enemy character (and ally character) that has appeared is played can be determined.

For example, even in the AT state, it is possible to perform an episode production in which the story progresses sequentially over multiple sets (for example, the 1st to 11th set), and the transition from the judge state to the strong BB state after the set is completed. In this case, a first special performance can be determined in which an episode related to the episode performance being executed (or an episode summarized as appropriate depending on the progress of the episode performance in the AT state) is played. In this way, even if the episode direction in the AT state has progressed to a certain extent and then shifts to the strong BB state, there will be no discrepancy in the relationship between them, and the advantageous state ( You can enjoy the first special performance during (strong BB state).

(Second special performance)
As mentioned above, in the second gaming machine, if the judge level becomes "Lv. 4" or "Lv. 5" in the AT state of 30 games in one set, the AT state will be extended to the next set. It is certain that this will happen. Furthermore, in the AT state, it is possible to provide multiple sets of all navigation states of 5 games in one set.

Here, since one set of AT states is 30 games, even if multiple sets of all Navi states are provided, the number of all Navi states that can be completed in one set of AT states is basically 6 sets. Therefore, in the second gaming machine, a continuous performance that can be executed between five games in all navigation states (for example, it may be configured as the above-mentioned "episodic performance" or may be configured as a different performance) Six types are prepared (referred to as "continuous effects 1 to 6"), and in the AT state, the effects are sequentially executed in response to one set of all navigation states being executed. Further, continuous performances 1 to 6 constitute a series of performances when they are connected in order (originally one performance, but this may be divided into six).

Then, a series of performances in which consecutive performances 1 to 6 are connected in order (some of them may have different beginnings and endings, but basically the same performances are fine) will be defined as a second special performance. It can be used for other purposes. In addition, when doing so, efforts are made to ensure that there are no discrepancies in the content.

Specifically, if the judge level becomes "Lv. 4" or "Lv. 5" in the set in AT state (if the corresponding "AP" is given), the following of the set In the game, a second special performance is executed. In this way, the same effect will be performed when the next set is confirmed in the AT state and when the all-navi state occurs, although the advantages are different. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show that the game is advantageous to the player, and it is also possible to reduce the amount of data for the performance.

In addition, when executing the second special effect in response to the judge level becoming "Lv. 4" or "Lv. If the second special performance is executed from the beginning, the player will not be able to watch the second special performance to the end, and there is a risk that the content will be inconsistent and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, when performing continuous effects 1 to 6 in all navigation states, the remaining number of games in the set is not taken into account (because they are divided into 5 games), but they are executed as the second special effect. If so, the number of remaining games in the set will be taken into account. For example, if the judge level becomes "Lv. 4" in the 21st game of the set, and the second special effect is to be executed from the 22nd game, from the 22nd to the 25th game, the 2nd special effect of continuous effect 5 The same effect as in the 5th game is executed, and the same effect as in the 1st to 5th games of continuous effect 6 is executed during the 26th to 30th games.

In other words, even if they are similar performances, when they are used as consecutive performances 1 to 6, they are each executed with so-called cueing, whereas when they are used as the second special performance, , it is possible to execute it from the middle regardless of the classification as continuous effects 1 to 6. In this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data by standardizing the performance data for performances performed in different situations, without causing discrepancies or giving a sense of discomfort, while in an advantageous state (AT state). You can enjoy the second special performance.

[10-8. Summary of inventions related to the second gaming machine (additional notes)]
As explained above, the second gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(First invention group)
In conventional gaming machines, there are two types: a special gaming state (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and a special gaming state (for example, AT state) in which the expectation level of transition to this special gaming state is higher than that of the normal gaming state. For example, a CZ (chance zone) state) has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-104445).

By the way, such a special game state is one of the states that increases the player's interest in the game, so if the gameplay related to the duration, lottery content, etc. is monotonous, the interest in the game will be reduced. There was a problem in that there was a risk that the

The first group of inventions aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of gaming.

A variable display means (e.g., a variable display section) that can variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, an internal winning combination determining means (e.g., a main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing) that determines an internal winning combination, and a A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) that stops the fluctuating display of symbols according to an internal winning combination and a player's stop operation, and a stop control means that is advantageous to the player when a special condition is satisfied. Special gaming state control means (for example, controlling each gaming state in the second gaming machine) capable of controlling the special gaming state (for example, RB state or BB state in the second gaming machine) in which information on the stop operation is notified main CPU 101) and a special gaming state (for example, a second gaming machine) in which the degree of expectation that the special condition will be met is higher than the normal gaming state (for example, the normal state in the second gaming machine) when the special condition is met. a special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine) capable of controlling the CZ2 state in the machine, and the specified end condition of the special gaming state is set to a predetermined winning combination ( For example, the number of times the predetermined symbol combination (for example, the bell on the second gaming machine) is not displayed in a game in which the push order bell on the second gaming machine is determined as the internal winning combination is the specified number of times (for example, 7 times). ).
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state where the expectation level of transition to the special game state is higher than that of the normal game state, the duration of the special game state is determined depending on whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won. changes. That is, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the game period of the special game state depending on the player's game results. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The stop control means displays the predetermined symbol combination when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, correct press order) in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. When a stop operation different from the mode is performed, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. As described above, the vehicle further comprises a special notification means (for example, an instruction monitor or an effect display section) that can notify information on a stop operation (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, or all-navigation) that is advantageous to the user. It is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won (that is, whether or not the game period of the special game state progresses) can be further determined by the stop operation. It also changes depending on whether or not the information is broadcast. That is, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the game period of the special game state depending on whether or not information on the stop operation is notified. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The special notification means may perform a first notification in which all of the predetermined modes are notified (for example, all navigation), and a second notification in which a part of the predetermined modes are notified (for example, 4-choice navigation or 2-way navigation). The above-described gaming machine is characterized in that the game machine may perform a selection navigation.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won (that is, whether or not the game period of the special game state progresses) can be further determined by the stop operation. It also varies depending on the notification mode of the information. That is, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the game period of the special game state also by the notification mode of the information on the stop operation. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The notification mode determining means further includes a notification mode determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a CZ2 Navi lottery) that determines the mode of notification performed by the special notification means, and the notification mode determining means determines the mode of notification performed by the special notification means. , when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the state in which the second notification can be made (for example, navigation state 1 or navigation state 2) is continued, and when the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second notification is continued. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that a state in which two notifications can be made is terminated.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, when a part of the stop operation mode in which a predetermined symbol combination is displayed is notified, the notification may be made depending on whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is finally displayed. A determination is made whether the condition continues. That is, the duration of the notification changes depending on the player's game result (selection result of the stop operation mode), and as a result, it is possible to cause ups and downs in the game period of the special game state. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The internal winning combination determining means is capable of determining a specific combination (for example, a common bell in the second gaming machine) that allows the predetermined symbol combination to be displayed as the internal winning combination regardless of the mode of the stop operation. This is the gaming machine described above.
According to this gaming machine, when a specific combination is won in a special game state, a predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the player's stop operation mode. ) It may be possible to give the impression that the game period in the special game state has been prevented from proceeding through the player's own stop operation, or that a predetermined benefit has been granted as will be described later. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the special game state, a privilege awarding means (for example, a CP award lottery) capable of awarding a predetermined privilege (for example, CP in the second gaming machine) that contributes to the establishment of the special condition is activated. The above-described gaming machine further includes a main CPU 101) for executing the game.
According to this gaming machine, for example, when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won, it is possible not only to avoid the game period of the special game state from progressing, but also to avoid the transition to the special game state. It is now possible to grant predetermined benefits that contribute to Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the benefit granting means is capable of granting the predetermined benefit in response to the fulfillment of the special condition.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a predetermined benefit even when a special gaming state is started. That is, even when a special game state is started, it is possible to change the expectation level of the special game state. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The benefit granting means may be capable of granting the predetermined benefit even when a special combination in which the predetermined symbol combination cannot be displayed (for example, a confirmed winning combination in a second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above is characterized by:
According to this gaming machine, even if a predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in the special game state, a predetermined benefit may be awarded. In other words, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation even if the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the above-described gaming machine, the special condition is enabled to be satisfied when the predetermined privilege is awarded in a predetermined state (for example, cumulative CP is 5) in the special game state. be.
According to this gaming machine, in a special game state, for example, if a predetermined combination is won and a predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed, the special game state continues and a predetermined benefit is also given, and as a cumulative result, the special game In some cases, the privilege of being able to transition to a state may also be granted. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

The special gaming state is configured to be able to continue even after the provision status of the predetermined privilege reaches the predetermined condition until the specified termination condition is met, and when the specified termination condition is met, the predetermined benefit is terminated. The special condition is established and the transition to the special gaming state occurs when the awarding status of the predetermined award reaches the predetermined situation, and the bonus granting means is configured to move to the special gaming state when the awarding status of the predetermined award reaches the predetermined status. The predetermined benefit can be granted even after the special gaming state has passed, and the special gaming state has multiple types with different advantages (for example, RB and BB in the second gaming machine), and the specified ending condition is met in the special gaming state. When the condition is satisfied, a specific situation (for example, cumulative CP of 6 or more) is reached in which the predetermined benefit is further granted than the case where the predetermined benefit is granted in the predetermined situation. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is easier to shift to the special gaming state, which is more advantageous, when the player is present.
According to this gaming machine, even if the granting status of the predetermined privilege reaches the predetermined condition and a transition to the special gaming state is decided, the special gaming state will continue until the specified termination conditions are met. When a predetermined benefit is granted, it becomes easier to shift to a special gaming state with a high degree of advantage. That is, the special gaming state is configured so that even after the transition to the special gaming state is determined, it is possible to provide further benefits during the remaining gaming period. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the special game state, if the specified termination condition is satisfied before the grant status of the predetermined benefit reaches the predetermined situation, a special game state that can determine at least whether or not the grant status of the predetermined benefit becomes the predetermined situation; The gaming machine described above further includes a determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a special CP awarding lottery).
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, even if the provision status of the predetermined benefit does not reach the predetermined status and the specified termination condition is met, the grant status of the predetermined benefit will eventually become the predetermined status. In some cases, a transition to a special gaming state may be determined. That is, the special game state is configured so that it can always give the player a sense of anticipation from the time it starts to the time it ends. Therefore, the gameplay of the special game state can be improved, and the interest of the game can be increased.

(Second invention group)
In conventional gaming machines, a special gaming state (for example, an AT gaming state) is provided in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and the gaming period of the special gaming state is set by one unit (set) of a predetermined number of games. A method has been proposed in which the continuation lottery is performed according to a predetermined continuation rate, and it is determined for each unit whether or not to continue the special gaming state (for example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008 - (See Publication No. 272233).

However, in such gaming machines, whether or not the special gaming state continues is determined simply according to a predetermined continuation rate, so the gameplay is monotonous and there is a risk that the interest in the game may decrease. There was a problem that there was.

The second group of inventions aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of gaming.

A variable display means (e.g., a variable display section) that can variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, an internal winning combination determining means (e.g., a main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing) that determines an internal winning combination, and a A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) that stops the fluctuating display of symbols according to an internal winning combination and a player's stop operation, and can notify the player of information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. A gaming state control means (for example, controlling the transition between each gaming state in the second gaming machine) that controls the transition between a plurality of gaming states including at least a special gaming state (for example, the AT state in the second gaming machine) main CPU 101), and an extension determining means (for example, a second a main CPU 101) that controls a judge state in the gaming machine, and the extension determining means determines the extension in response to one unit (for example, 30 games in one set) of games being played in the special gaming state. It is possible to make a decision on whether or not to extend the special gaming state, and if it is determined to extend the special gaming state based on the decision on whether or not to extend the extension, the gaming state control means moves the special gaming state to the next unit and extends the extension. If it is not decided to extend the special gaming state based on the decision on whether or not to extend the special gaming state, it is possible to end the special gaming state in that unit. It is possible to assign a specific value (for example, AP) based on the specific value assigned in the special gaming state of the unit, and the extension determining means can determine whether or not the extension is possible based on at least the specific value assigned in the special gaming state of the unit. This is a gaming machine characterized by the following.
According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation for extension of whether or not the special gaming state will be extended varies for each unit depending on the grant status of the specific value and the result of determining whether or not the extension is possible. In other words, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for extension of the special gaming state for each unit depending on the player's gaming results. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The specific awarding condition includes displaying a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine), and the stop control means includes displaying a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine). In a game determined as an internal winning combination, if a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, correct press order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, while a stop operation different from the predetermined manner is performed. In this case, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special gaming state, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for displaying the predetermined symbol combination (for example, , 2-choice navigation, and all-option navigation).
According to this gaming machine, in a special game state, displaying a predetermined symbol combination in a game in which a predetermined combination is won is one of the specific granting conditions for giving a specific value, and this predetermined symbol combination is displayed. Whether or not the information on the stop operation is notified varies depending on whether or not the information on the stop operation is notified. In other words, in the special gaming state, it is possible to change the grant status of a specific value depending on whether or not information on a stop operation is notified for a given combination, and also to change the degree of advantage in determining whether or not to extend the winning combination thereafter. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The information notification means may perform a first notification (for example, all navigation) in which all of the predetermined aspects are notified, and a second notification (for example, two-choice navigation) in which a part of the predetermined aspects are notified. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that there are cases in which the game is played.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won also varies depending on the notification mode of the stop operation information. In other words, in the special gaming state, it is possible to change the grant status of the specific value depending on the notification mode of the information on the stop operation related to the predetermined winning combination, and thereby also change the degree of advantage in determining whether or not to extend the winning combination thereafter. . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

It further includes a notification mode determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an all-navigation state lottery or an AT navigation lottery) that determines the manner of notification performed by the information notification means, and the notification mode determining means is configured to determine a notification mode in the special game state. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is possible to continue a state (for example, an all-navigation state) in which the first notification can be performed over a plurality of games.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, a state where all of the stop operation modes in which a predetermined symbol combination is displayed may continue over a plurality of games. In other words, it is possible to create a state in which the provision of a specific value is given preferential treatment depending on the manner in which the information on the stop operation is reported, without unnecessarily increasing the control load. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The internal winning combination deciding means is capable of determining a specific winning combination (for example, a common bell in a second gaming machine) in which the predetermined symbol combination can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and is capable of determining the special winning combination as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that even when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination in a gaming state, the information notification means can notify.
According to this gaming machine, when a specific combination is won in the special gaming state, a predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In this case, for example, if the information on the stop operation is not reported (or, for example, only a part of the information is reported), the player may not be able to perform the stop operation (even though he/she wins the prescribed winning combination). In some cases, it may be possible to give the impression that a specific value has been assigned, etc., and for example, when information on a stop operation is announced, it may be possible to give the impression that a specific value has been assigned. There are cases where it is possible. In other words, when winning a predetermined combination, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to a series of undesirable game results or lottery results. This makes it possible to make the gameplay even more diverse. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, if the predetermined symbol combination is displayed without being notified by the information notification means, the specific value is additionally given. The above-described gaming machine is characterized in that there are cases in which an additional lottery is performed when a self-reliance bell is displayed.
According to this gaming machine, the fact that information regarding a stop operation is not notified may not necessarily be disadvantageous to the player. In other words, if the stop operation is not notified, compared to the case where the stop operation is notified, the player may be given an additional specific value, so the stop operation is not notified. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the absence of the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The extension possibility determination is performed in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game, it is decided to extend the special game state. , The above-described gaming machine is characterized in that even in the game where the extension possibility decision is made, the information notification means can provide notification (for example, a navigation lottery during judgment is performed).
According to this gaming machine, the predetermined combination is further used to determine whether or not to extend the winning combination, and it is also possible to determine whether or not information on a stop operation is to be reported when determining whether or not to extend the winning combination. In other words, the predetermined winning combination changes the grant status of a specific value in the special gaming state, and changes the decision result when determining whether or not to extend the winning combination.Furthermore, the information on the stop operation regarding the predetermined winning combination is announced. It is also possible to vary the degree of expectation for extension of the special game state depending on whether or not the special game state is extended. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game. Further, even in this case, there is no need to increase the combination of winnings or the gaming state, so it is possible to suppress increases in the amount of data and control load.

The plurality of gaming states further include an extension determining state (for example, a judge state in the second gaming machine) in which it is possible to decide whether or not to extend the game, and the gaming state control means controls the game state to be executed by one unit in the special gaming state. When the games for minutes have been played, the state is shifted to the extension decision state, and in the extension decision state, if it is decided to extend the special gaming state by the extension decision, the special gaming state is shifted to the next unit. and if it is not decided to extend the special gaming state by the extension propriety determination, it is possible to end the special gaming state in the unit concerned, and the specific value is given in the special gaming state. Then, it becomes possible to set a stage (for example, Lv. 0 to Lv. 5) according to the accumulated grant results, and in the extension determination state, the extension propriety determination is performed the number of times according to the set stage. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is possible to do the following.
According to this gaming machine, in the extension determination state, the extension propriety determination is made the number of times according to the stage set according to the assigned specific value. As a result, for example, in the special gaming state, it is possible to allocate a specific value in small portions by lottery, so it is possible to increase expectations for the provision of a specific value during the special gaming state, and in the extension decision state, it is possible to decide whether or not to extend. Since the number of executions can be easily understood, it is possible to prevent the gameplay from becoming difficult to understand. Further, for example, it is possible to increase expectations by showing the player information suggesting the given specific value and the stage set by this value. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the extension determination state, if the set stage is a specific stage (for example, Lv. 4) or higher, it is always determined to extend the special gaming state. It is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, when the specific value given in the special gaming state becomes a specific situation and a stage higher than the specific stage is set, it is definitely determined that the special gaming state is extended. In other words, the extension of the special gaming state may be determined depending on the grant status of the specific value during the special gaming state, so the gameplay can be made more diverse, and the expectations during the special gaming state can be increased. It is now possible to further increase the Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the special game state, it is possible to determine whether or not the set stage is the highest stage (for example, a Lv.5 promotion lottery is performed), regardless of the cumulative award result of the specific value. The gaming machine described above is characterized by:
According to this gaming machine, for example, even if the current specific value provision situation in the special gaming state is undesirable for the player, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The plurality of gaming states are gaming states in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and further includes a specific gaming state (for example, a BB state in a second gaming machine) different from the special gaming state. and the gaming state control means is capable of shifting the special gaming state to the specific gaming state and then shifting the special gaming state to the next unit when it is determined to extend the special gaming state by the extension propriety determination. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is possible.
According to this gaming machine, when the special gaming state is extended to the next unit, the special gaming state may go through a specific gaming state that is also advantageous to the player. In other words, when determining whether or not to extend the special gaming state, it is not only decided whether or not to extend the special gaming state, but also that the special gaming state may be extended after transitioning to a specific gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the gameplay even more diverse, and it is also possible to further increase the anticipation of determining whether or not to extend the period. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the gameplay regarding the extension of the special gaming state, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Third invention group)
A conventional gaming machine has been proposed in which the player can select the content of the performance executed during a special gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus game) by selecting a favorite character. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-148810).

By the way, in such gaming machines, it is possible to provide various types of special gaming states, and the specifications such as the starting trigger and timing are also diverse. Therefore, depending on the type of special game state, the player may not be able to smoothly select the performance, and there is a problem that interest in the performance may be reduced.

The third group of inventions aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in performance.

A variable display means (e.g., a variable display section) that can variably display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, an internal winning combination determining means (e.g., a main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing) that determines an internal winning combination, and a A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) that stops the fluctuating display of symbols according to an internal winning combination and a player's stop operation, and a stop control means that is advantageous to the player when a special condition is satisfied. A special gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine) capable of controlling a special gaming state (for example, the RB state in the second gaming machine) in which information on a stop operation is notified. and a performance execution means (for example, a performance display section) that executes a performance, and a performance operation means (for example, a performance button) that can accept a performance operation from a player regarding the performance executed by the performance execution means. In preparation, the special game state is a special symbol performance (for example, a lock medium white BAR matching performance) that causes the variable display means to stop displaying a special symbol combination when the next game after the game in which the special condition is satisfied is started. is started after the special game state is started, and the performance execution means selects the performance mode (for example, announcement type) in the special game state from among a plurality of performance modes in the game in which the special game state is started. It is possible to execute a selection effect for making a selection from among the above, and when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation after executing the selection effect, the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode is executed in the special game. This is a gaming machine that is characterized by being executed during a state.
According to this gaming machine, the special game state is configured such that it is started after the special symbol performance is executed when the next game after the game in which the transition condition has been satisfied is started, and in the starting game, the A selection performance is executed that allows the player to select the performance mode during the special game state. In other words, even if the special game state is started after the corresponding symbol performance is executed in the first game, it is possible to smoothly select the performance mode during the flow of the game. . Therefore, even in the special game state with such a configuration, performance selection can be performed smoothly, and interest in the performance can be increased.

After executing the selected performance, when one performance mode is selected by the player's performance operation, the performance execution means executes a result performance indicating the selection result of the performance mode in the game, and executes a result performance indicative of the selection result of the performance mode in the game. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it executes a performance according to a performance mode selected from the game.
According to this gaming machine, in the starting game of the special game state, after the special symbol performance is executed and the selection performance is executed, when the player selects the performance mode, the result performance corresponding to this selection result in the game. is executed, and the effect is executed in the selected effect form from the next game. In other words, the starting game of the special game state is changed to the effect at the time of its introduction, while maintaining the benefits of the special game state (for example, being notified of information on advantageous stop operations and being granted specific benefits described below). It is now possible to configure the system so that it can be performed. Therefore, even in the special game state with such a configuration, the introduction performance including performance selection can be smoothly executed, and the interest in the performance can be increased.

The game system further includes a benefit granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a BB promotion lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific benefit during the special gaming state, and the benefit granting means is configured to determine whether or not to grant a specific benefit during the special gaming state. It is also possible to decide whether or not to grant the specific benefit in a game, and the performance execution means determines that the benefit granting device decides to grant the specific benefit in the game in which the special gaming state has started. In this case, after executing the selection performance, if one performance mode is selected by the player's performance operation, a specific performance different from the result performance (for example, a promotion suggestion performance) can be executed in the game. The gaming machine described above is characterized by the following.
According to this gaming machine, a specific benefit may be given even in the starting game of the special game state, and in this case, when the player performs a performance operation related to performance selection, it is possible to execute a specific performance that is different from the result performance. shall be. That is, originally, in a situation indicating the selection result of performance selection, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of providing a specific benefit by executing a performance with different content. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the interest of the performance at the time of introduction in the special game state having such a configuration, and it is possible to increase the interest of the performance.

In the game in which the special game state is started, after the selected performance is executed by the performance execution means, the symbols of all rows are displayed in a variable manner without selecting one performance mode by the player's performance operation. In the case of stopping, if it is determined by the benefit granting means not to grant the specific benefit, one predetermined performance mode is determined, and the result performance is executed by the performance execution means. , the above-described gaming machine is characterized in that when the bonus granting means has decided to grant the specific bonus, the performance executing unit executes the specific performance.
According to this gaming machine, even if a player does not select an effect due to, for example, not having much interest in selecting an effect or wanting to advance the game quickly, the result will not change at the end of the game. There are times when a performance is performed, and furthermore, a specific performance is sometimes performed. Therefore, while taking into consideration the player's intentions, it is possible to dramatically increase the interest of the introduction performance in the special game state with such a configuration, and it is possible to increase the interest regarding the performance.

The effect executing means is configured to perform the above-mentioned effect without executing the selected effect when the benefit providing means determines to impart the specific benefit in a game subsequent to the game in which the special game state has been started. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is capable of executing a specific performance.
According to this gaming machine, the specific performance that suggests the result of granting a specific benefit functions as one of the operation-linked performances whose mode changes depending on the player's performance operation in the starting game of the special game state, In subsequent games, it functions as one of the suggestive effects. Therefore, not only can the interest in the performance be increased, but also the amount of data related to the performance can be suppressed.

The plurality of presentation modes include a first presentation mode (for example, notice type B which is a complete notice pattern) and a second presentation mode (for example, notice type C which is a reel notice pattern). The performance mode is a performance mode in which the specific performance is always executed when the bonus granting means determines to grant the specific benefit in a game subsequent to the game in which the special gaming state has been started. and the second effect mode is such that even if it is determined by the benefit granting means to grant the specific benefit in a game subsequent to the game in which the special gaming state has been started, the The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the performance mode is such that no specific performance is executed.
According to this gaming machine, in the game after the start game in the special gaming state, depending on the selected performance mode, the specific performance may or may not suggest the awarding result of the specific benefit. It has become. In the latter case, for example, the player can be informed of the result of awarding a specific benefit by executing a specific symbol effect, which will be described later. That is, depending on the selected notification mode, it is possible to notify the player of the awarding result of the specific benefit using various methods. Therefore, it is possible to provide a rich variety of suggestive presentations in accordance with the player's intentions, thereby increasing the interest in the presentation.

When a specific condition is satisfied, control is performed to a specific gaming state (for example, a BB state in a second gaming machine) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, which is a gaming state different from the special gaming state. It further includes a specific gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine), and the specific gaming state is set when the next game after the game in which the specific condition is satisfied is started. This is started after a specific symbol presentation (for example, a red 7 on lock presentation) is executed to stop displaying a specific symbol combination on the variable display means, and the specific benefit is granted by the benefit granting device. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied.
According to this gaming machine, the specific privilege is a privilege of transitioning to a specific gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, a specific symbol performance is executed when the next game of the game in which the transition condition is satisfied is started. is configured to start after That is, for example, when transitioning to a special game state, the game starts after the special symbol performance is executed in the starting game, but if a specific benefit is given in that game, the next game is the start of the specific game state. In the starting game, a specific symbol performance is executed and then a specific game state is started. In this case, in the starting game of the special gaming state, a specific performance is executed in accordance with the player's performance operation, and then the starting game of the specific gaming state starts, so these performances will not affect the flow of the game. This will be implemented in a highly interconnected manner. Therefore, even when the special game state and the specific game state are configured in this way, the linkage and consistency of the performance can be dramatically improved, and the interest regarding the performance can be increased.

A predetermined gaming state that is different from the special gaming state and the specific gaming state and is controllable to a predetermined gaming state (for example, an AT state in a second gaming machine) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. further comprising a gaming state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls each gaming state in the second gaming machine), the special gaming state is a gaming state that may not transition to the predetermined gaming state after its termination; The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state that always transitions to the predetermined gaming state after the specific gaming state ends.
According to this gaming machine, the special gaming state and the specific gaming state are similar gaming states in that they both notify the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player. While the specific gaming state is a gaming state that may not shift to a gaming state, it is advantageous to the player in that the specific gaming state is a gaming state that always shifts to a predetermined gaming state after the specific gaming state ends. The specific performance suggests a transition to the specific gaming state based on such gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the performance.

The stop control means is configured to control the stop control means when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, correct press order) in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, a push order bell in a second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination. displays a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine) that gives a predetermined amount of gaming value (for example, 9 pieces), while if a stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed. The special game state in which the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed is a game state in which the stop operation in the predetermined mode may not be notified in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination; , the gaming machine described above is characterized in that the game state is a game state in which the stop operation in the predetermined manner is always notified in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
According to this gaming machine, the special gaming state and the specific gaming state are similar gaming states in that they both notify the player of information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player, but the special gaming state is different from the one in which the player wins a predetermined combination. While this is a gaming state in which information on an advantageous stop operation is sometimes not reported, the specific gaming state is advantageous to the player in that it is a gaming state in which information on an advantageous stop operation is always reported when a predetermined combination is won. It becomes. The specific performance suggests a transition to the specific gaming state based on such gameplay. Therefore, it is possible to increase interest in the performance.

If the specified end condition (for example, 21 games have been played) is met in the special gaming state without the specific condition being satisfied, the amount of gaming value awarded during the special gaming state will be reduced to a specific amount ( For example, the gaming machine described above is characterized in that if the number of coins is less than 0, the gaming machine shifts to the specific gaming state.
According to this gaming machine, if the game result during the special gaming state is an undesirable result for the player, it is possible to shift to the specific gaming state after the special gaming state ends even if the special condition is not satisfied. There is. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the interest in the performance, but also to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

If the specific condition is satisfied in the special gaming state, the special gaming state ends even before the specified ending condition is met, and the next game is shifted to the specific gaming state. It is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, if it is decided to move to a specific gaming state during the special gaming state, it is possible to end the special gaming state even in the middle of the transition. Therefore, not only can the interest in the performance be increased, but also it is possible to prevent the game from becoming too gambling-like.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachislot machine, 71... Main control board, 72... Sub control board, 100... Main control circuit, 101... Main CPU, 200... Sub control circuit, 201... Sub CPU

Claims (1)

a variable display means capable of variable displaying multiple symbols in multiple columns;
a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination;
stop control means for stopping the fluctuating display of symbols in accordance with the determination result by the winning combination determining means and a stop operation by the player;
a notification means capable of reporting information on a stop operation advantageous to a player;
comprising a notification mode determining means capable of determining a notification mode by the notification means,
When the winning combination determining means determines a predetermined combination as a winning combination, the stop control means displays a symbol combination that can give a predetermined number of gaming values if the stop operation is performed in a correct manner. , if the stop operation is performed in a manner different from the correct answer manner, it is possible to not display the symbol combination that can give the predetermined number of gaming values;
The state in which the notification by the notification means is possible includes a first state, a second state, and a third state,
When the winning combination determining means determines the predetermined combination as a winning combination, the notification mode determining means determines the notification mode in a first determination manner in the first state, and in a second determination manner in the second state. It is possible to determine the notification mode in a third state, and in the third state to determine the notification mode in a third determination mode,
When the notification mode is determined in the third determination mode, all of the correct answer modes are notified, but when the notification mode is determined in the first determination mode and the second determination mode, In some cases, all of the correct answer modes may not be reported,
The stop control means is capable of displaying a symbol combination that can give the predetermined number of gaming values regardless of the mode of the stop operation when the winning combination determining means determines a specific combination as a winning combination;
The notification mode determining means is capable of determining the notification mode in the second determination mode even when the winning combination determining means determines the specific combination as a winning combination in the second state;
When determining the notification mode in the second determination mode, it may be determined that the correct answer mode is not notified;
The probability that the correct answer mode will not be reported is higher when the winning combination determining means determines the specific combination as the winning combination than when the winning combination determining means determines the predetermined combination as the winning combination. is high;
In the first state, there is no set number of games, and the number of times a symbol combination that can give the predetermined number of gaming values is not displayed in a game in which the winning combination determination means has determined the predetermined combination as a winning combination is defined. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to be able to continue playing until a specified number of times is reached .

Images